From bd5d5a3c4e8df77ff434b0f5ed34b07cae728fd3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "github-actions[bot]" <41898282+github-actions[bot]@users.noreply.github.com> Date: Mon, 27 Jul 2026 19:16:50 +0200 Subject: [PATCH] i18n - docs translations (#23381) Created by Github action Co-authored-by: github-actions --- .../extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx | 2 +- .../capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx | 22 +++++++++++++++++++ packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/navigation.json | 8 +++++++ .../capabilities/import-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx | 6 +---- .../data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/relation-fields.mdx | 4 ++-- .../how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx | 8 +++---- .../how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx | 22 ++++++++++++++----- .../data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx | 13 ++++++----- .../capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx | 6 +---- .../capabilities/domains-settings.mdx | 9 ++++---- .../capabilities/member-management.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/profile-settings.mdx | 6 ++--- .../settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx | 11 +++++----- .../capabilities/calendar-view.mdx | 2 +- .../need-more-help/professional-services.mdx | 2 +- .../extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx | 2 +- .../capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx | 22 +++++++++++++++++++ packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/navigation.json | 8 +++++++ .../capabilities/import-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx | 6 +---- .../data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/relation-fields.mdx | 4 ++-- .../how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx | 8 +++---- .../how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx | 22 ++++++++++++++----- .../data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx | 13 ++++++----- .../capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx | 6 +---- .../capabilities/domains-settings.mdx | 9 ++++---- .../capabilities/member-management.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/profile-settings.mdx | 6 ++--- .../settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx | 11 +++++----- .../capabilities/calendar-view.mdx | 2 +- .../need-more-help/professional-services.mdx | 2 +- .../extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx | 2 +- .../capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx | 22 +++++++++++++++++++ packages/twenty-docs/l/de/navigation.json | 8 +++++++ .../capabilities/import-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx | 6 +---- .../data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx | 15 +++++++------ .../capabilities/relation-fields.mdx | 4 ++-- .../how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx | 8 +++---- .../how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx | 22 ++++++++++++++----- .../data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx | 13 ++++++----- .../capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx | 6 +---- .../capabilities/domains-settings.mdx | 9 ++++---- .../capabilities/member-management.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/profile-settings.mdx | 6 ++--- .../settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx | 11 +++++----- .../capabilities/calendar-view.mdx | 2 +- .../need-more-help/professional-services.mdx | 2 +- .../extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx | 2 +- .../capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx | 22 +++++++++++++++++++ packages/twenty-docs/l/es/navigation.json | 8 +++++++ .../capabilities/import-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx | 6 +---- .../data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/relation-fields.mdx | 4 ++-- .../how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx | 8 +++---- .../how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx | 22 ++++++++++++++----- .../data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx | 13 ++++++----- .../capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx | 6 +---- .../capabilities/domains-settings.mdx | 9 ++++---- .../capabilities/member-management.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/profile-settings.mdx | 6 ++--- .../settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx | 11 +++++----- .../capabilities/calendar-view.mdx | 2 +- .../need-more-help/professional-services.mdx | 2 +- .../extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx | 2 +- .../capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx | 22 +++++++++++++++++++ packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/navigation.json | 8 +++++++ .../capabilities/import-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx | 8 ++----- .../data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/relation-fields.mdx | 4 ++-- .../how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx | 8 +++---- .../how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx | 22 ++++++++++++++----- .../data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx | 13 ++++++----- .../capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx | 6 +---- .../capabilities/domains-settings.mdx | 9 ++++---- .../capabilities/member-management.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/profile-settings.mdx | 6 ++--- .../settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx | 11 +++++----- .../capabilities/calendar-view.mdx | 2 +- .../need-more-help/professional-services.mdx | 2 +- .../extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx | 2 +- .../capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx | 22 +++++++++++++++++++ packages/twenty-docs/l/it/navigation.json | 8 +++++++ .../capabilities/import-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx | 8 ++----- .../data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/relation-fields.mdx | 4 ++-- .../how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx | 8 +++---- .../how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx | 22 ++++++++++++++----- .../data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx | 13 ++++++----- .../capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx | 6 +---- .../capabilities/domains-settings.mdx | 9 ++++---- .../capabilities/member-management.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/profile-settings.mdx | 6 ++--- .../settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx | 11 +++++----- .../capabilities/calendar-view.mdx | 2 +- .../need-more-help/professional-services.mdx | 2 +- .../extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx | 2 +- .../capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx | 22 +++++++++++++++++++ packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/navigation.json | 8 +++++++ .../capabilities/import-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx | 7 +----- .../data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx | 15 +++++++------ .../capabilities/relation-fields.mdx | 4 ++-- .../how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx | 8 +++---- .../how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx | 22 ++++++++++++++----- .../data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx | 15 +++++++------ .../capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx | 6 +---- .../capabilities/domains-settings.mdx | 9 ++++---- .../capabilities/member-management.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/profile-settings.mdx | 6 ++--- .../settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx | 11 +++++----- .../capabilities/calendar-view.mdx | 2 +- .../need-more-help/professional-services.mdx | 2 +- .../extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx | 2 +- .../capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx | 22 +++++++++++++++++++ packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/navigation.json | 8 +++++++ .../capabilities/import-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx | 6 +---- .../data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx | 15 +++++++------ .../capabilities/relation-fields.mdx | 4 ++-- .../how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx | 8 +++---- .../how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx | 22 ++++++++++++++----- .../data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx | 13 ++++++----- .../capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx | 6 +---- .../capabilities/domains-settings.mdx | 9 ++++---- .../capabilities/member-management.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/profile-settings.mdx | 6 ++--- .../settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx | 11 +++++----- .../capabilities/calendar-view.mdx | 2 +- .../need-more-help/professional-services.mdx | 2 +- .../extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx | 2 +- .../capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx | 22 +++++++++++++++++++ packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/navigation.json | 8 +++++++ .../capabilities/import-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx | 6 +---- .../data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/relation-fields.mdx | 4 ++-- .../how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx | 8 +++---- .../how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx | 22 ++++++++++++++----- .../data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx | 13 ++++++----- .../capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx | 6 +---- .../capabilities/domains-settings.mdx | 9 ++++---- .../capabilities/member-management.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/profile-settings.mdx | 6 ++--- .../settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx | 11 +++++----- .../need-more-help/professional-services.mdx | 2 +- .../extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx | 2 +- .../capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx | 22 +++++++++++++++++++ packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/navigation.json | 8 +++++++ .../capabilities/import-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx | 6 +---- .../data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/relation-fields.mdx | 4 ++-- .../how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx | 8 +++---- .../how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx | 22 ++++++++++++++----- .../data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx | 13 ++++++----- .../capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx | 6 +---- .../capabilities/domains-settings.mdx | 9 ++++---- .../capabilities/member-management.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/profile-settings.mdx | 6 ++--- .../settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx | 11 +++++----- .../capabilities/calendar-view.mdx | 2 +- .../need-more-help/professional-services.mdx | 2 +- .../extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx | 2 +- .../capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx | 22 +++++++++++++++++++ packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/navigation.json | 8 +++++++ .../capabilities/import-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx | 8 ++----- .../data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/relation-fields.mdx | 4 ++-- .../how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx | 8 +++---- .../how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx | 22 ++++++++++++++----- .../data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx | 13 ++++++----- .../capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx | 6 +---- .../capabilities/domains-settings.mdx | 9 ++++---- .../capabilities/member-management.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/profile-settings.mdx | 6 ++--- .../settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx | 11 +++++----- .../capabilities/calendar-view.mdx | 2 +- .../need-more-help/professional-services.mdx | 2 +- .../extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx | 2 +- .../capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx | 22 +++++++++++++++++++ packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/navigation.json | 8 +++++++ .../capabilities/import-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx | 6 +---- .../data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx | 15 +++++++------ .../capabilities/relation-fields.mdx | 4 ++-- .../how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx | 8 +++---- .../how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx | 2 +- .../how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx | 22 ++++++++++++++----- .../data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx | 13 ++++++----- .../capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx | 6 +---- .../capabilities/domains-settings.mdx | 9 ++++---- .../capabilities/member-management.mdx | 17 +++++++------- .../capabilities/profile-settings.mdx | 6 ++--- .../settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx | 11 +++++----- .../capabilities/calendar-view.mdx | 2 +- .../need-more-help/professional-services.mdx | 2 +- 227 files changed, 1174 insertions(+), 757 deletions(-) diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx index 43bb85bbf2..b250838ddd 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ export default definePageLayout({ ### النقاط الرئيسية -* `type` يكون عادة `'RECORD_PAGE'` لتخصيص عرض التفاصيل لكائن محدّد. +* `type` هو واحد من `'RECORD_INDEX'` أو `'RECORD_PAGE'` أو `'DASHBOARD'` أو `'STANDALONE_PAGE'`. استخدم `'RECORD_PAGE'` لتخصيص عرض التفاصيل لكائن محدّد. * `objectUniversalIdentifier` يحدّد الكائن الذي ينطبق عليه هذا التخطيط. * يُعرّف كل `tab` قسمًا من الصفحة مع `title` و`position` و`layoutMode` (`VERTICAL_LIST` لصفحات السجلات، و`GRID` للوحات المعلومات). تعرض علامة تبويب تحتوي على عنصر واجهة واحد هذا العنصر ممتدًا حتى الحواف تلقائيًا؛ وعند وجود عدة عناصر واجهة، فإنها تتكدس كبطاقات. * يمكن لكل `widget` داخل لسان أن يعرض [front component](/l/ar/developers/extend/apps/layout/front-components)، أو قائمة علاقات، أو أنواعًا أخرى من عناصر الواجهة (widgets) المدمجة. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx index 9d6580fc17..0279dbd849 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx @@ -171,6 +171,28 @@ plugins: [ في بيئة الإنتاج، يتم تعطيل دوال المنطق افتراضيًا. قم بتعيين متغير البيئة `LOGIC_FUNCTION_TYPE` إلى `LOCAL` أو `LAMBDA` لتمكينها. يمكن تكوين ذلك عبر متغيرات البيئة أو من خلال متغيرات قاعدة البيانات في لوحة الإدارة. راجع [دليل إعداد دوال المنطق](/l/ar/developers/self-host/capabilities/setup#logic-functions-available-drivers) للحصول على التفاصيل. +#### عندما أكتب رسالة في دردشة الذكاء الاصطناعي ، فإنها لا تجيب على الفور ويجب علي تحديث الصفحة لمشاهدة الإجابة + +إضافة الكتلة التالية إلى تكوين nginx + +``` +location ~* ^/api/.*stream|\/graphql\/stream { +proxy_pass http://twenty_backend; +proxy_http_version 1.1; +proxy_set_header Connection ""; +proxy_set_header Host $host; +proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-For $proxy_add_x_forwarded_for; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme; +proxy_buffering off; +proxy_request_buffering off; +proxy_cache off; +gzip off; +#chunked_transfer_encoding off; +add_header X-Accel-Buffering no always; +} +``` + ### Docker compose بنقرة واحدة #### غير قادر على تسجيل الدخول diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/navigation.json b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/navigation.json index 3f52784c1d..fa27436321 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/navigation.json +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/navigation.json @@ -145,6 +145,14 @@ "label": "الإرشادات" } } + }, + "legal": { + "label": "قانوني", + "groups": { + "legalHowTos": { + "label": "الإرشادات" + } + } } } }, diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx index 6790041226..9c34711ba8 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ description: استيراد العلاقات بين السجلات عبر CSV. * يرتبط العديد من الأشخاص بالعديد من المشاريع -تم التخطيط لعلاقات متعدد إلى متعدد للنصف الأول من 2026. +العديد من العلاقات مخطط لها لـ H2 2026. ## ربط السجلات أثناء الاستيراد diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx index b0c6b558fd..53be379d24 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ import { VimeoEmbed } from '/snippets/vimeo-embed.mdx'; 1. اذهب إلى `الإعدادات` في الشريط الجانبي الأيسر. 2. اذهب إلى `نموذج البيانات`، ثم حدد الكائن الذي ترغب في تخصيصه. -3. تقدم من خلال النقر على `إضافة حقل`. +3. تابع عن طريق النقر على `+ New Field`. 4. اختر اسم الحقل والنوع الذي يناسب احتياجاتك. فكر في إضافة وصف للحقل لفهم أفضل. أصبح الحقل الجديد الذي أنشأته الآن متاحًا ضمن حقول التطبيق. لعرضه في عرض محدد، انقر على قائمة الخيارات، ثم اختر `الحقول`. @@ -78,9 +78,7 @@ import { VimeoEmbed } from '/snippets/vimeo-embed.mdx'; إليك كيفية القيام بذلك: 1. ابحث عن الحقل الذي تريد إلغاء تنشيطه في إعدادات الكائن الخاصة بك. - 2. انقر على الثلاث نقاط `⋮` بجانب الحقل لفتح القائمة. - 3. اختر `إلغاء التنشيط` من القائمة المنسدلة. @@ -88,9 +86,7 @@ import { VimeoEmbed } from '/snippets/vimeo-embed.mdx'; ماذا يحدث عند إلغاء تنشيط حقل؟ 1. **في التطبيق:** يختفي الحقل ولا يمكنك إضافة قيم جديدة إليه. - 2. **العلاقات الموجودة:** إذا كان حقل علاقة، ستبقى الروابط القائمة ولكن لا يمكنك إنشاء روابط جديدة. - 3. **الوصول عبر API:** لا يزال بإمكانك الوصول إلى الحقل وبياناته عبر API. يمكنك إعادة تنشيط الحقول القياسية والمخصصة أو لديك خيار حذفها نهائيًا. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx index a3ca95e68c..6dda8cd489 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ import { VimeoEmbed } from '/snippets/vimeo-embed.mdx'; كائن "الأشخاص" يخزن جهات الاتصال الخاصة بك. يتضمن تفاصيل الاتصال وتاريخ التفاعل، مما يتيح لك رؤية جميع تفاعلات العملاء في مكان واحد. -### الشركة +### الشركات كائن "الشركات" يخزن المعلومات المتعلقة بحسابات العمل الخاصة بك. يتضمن تفاصيل مثل الصناعة والحجم والموقع. الشركات تتصل بكائنات "الأشخاص" و "الفرص". @@ -47,7 +47,6 @@ import { VimeoEmbed } from '/snippets/vimeo-embed.mdx'; 3. انقر على "+ كائن جديد" في الأعلى. أدخل الاسم (مفرد وجمع)، اختر أيقونة، أضف وصفًا للكائن المخصص واضغط حفظ (في الزاوية العليا اليمنى). باستخدام القائمة كمثال للكائن المخصص، سيكون المفرد هو "قائمة" والجمع "قوائم" مع الوصف كمثل "قوائم قام المضيفون بإنشائها لعرض ممتلكاتهم." - 4. تم الآن إنشاء الكائن المخصص الخاص بك وسيظهر في الشريط الجانبي لديك. يمكنك البدء في إضافة السجلات إليه فورًا. ## إدارة الكائنات @@ -57,18 +56,20 @@ import { VimeoEmbed } from '/snippets/vimeo-embed.mdx'; إذا لم تكن بحاجة إلى كائن قياسي أو مخصص: 1. انتقل إلى الإعدادات → نموذج البيانات -2. اعثر على الكائن الذي تريد إلغاء تنشيطه -3. انقر زر التبديل لإلغاء تنشيطه -4. سيتم إخفاء الكائن من مساحة العمل لديك ولكن سيتم الاحتفاظ بالبيانات +2. العثور على الكائن الذي تريد إلغاء تفعيله والنقر عليه +3. اذهب إلى تبويب **إعدادات** الكائن +4. انقر فوق زر "إلغاء التفعيل" +5. سيتم إخفاء الكائن من مساحة العمل لديك ولكن سيتم الاحتفاظ بالبيانات ### إعادة تنشيط الكائنات لإعادة كائن تم إلغاء تنشيطه: 1. انتقل إلى الإعدادات → نموذج البيانات -2. ابحث عن الكائنات التي تم إلغاء تنشيطها (ستظهر باللون الرمادي) -3. انقر زر التبديل لإعادة تنشيطه -4. سيتم استعادة الكائن وجميع بياناته +2. تمكين فلتر "معطل" +3. ابحث عن الكائنات المعطلة (لديهم 'تعطيل' بجانب اسمه) +4. انقر على `⋮` ثم على `Activate` لإعادة تنشيطه +5. سيتم استعادة الكائن وجميع بياناته ## أفضل الممارسات diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx index 1a9aa6ebad..fe0ce7300e 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ description: اربط السجلات عبر كائنات مختلفة باستخ -**ميزة المختبر**: يجب تمكين علاقات الربط في **الإعدادات → التحديثات → المختبر** قبل الاستخدام. +**ميزة المختبرات**: يجب تمكين علاقات الفصل في **الإعدادات → مجتمع الميزات** قبل الاستخدام. راجع [كيفية إنشاء علاقات متعدد-إلى-متعدد](/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations) للحصول على دليل كامل خطوة بخطوة. @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ description: اربط السجلات عبر كائنات مختلفة باستخ 1. اذهب إلى **الإعدادات → نموذج البيانات** 2. حدد الكائن الذي تريد إضافة العلاقة إليه -3. انقر **+ إضافة حقل** +3. انقر فوق **+ حقل جديد** 4. اختر **العلاقة** كنوع الحقل 5. اختر الكائن(ات) الهدف للربط بها 6. كوّن إعدادات العلاقة: diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx index 493a1ac1b3..045f22cac3 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ description: دليل خطوة بخطوة لإضافة حقول مخصصة إل 1. اذهب إلى **الإعدادات → نموذج البيانات** 2. حدد الكائن الذي تريد إضافة حقل إليه -3. انقر **+ إضافة حقل** +3. انقر فوق **+ حقل جديد** 4. اختر **نوع الحقل** (راجع [الحقول](/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields) للاطلاع على جميع الأنواع) 5. أدخل **اسم الحقل** ووصفًا اختياريًا 6. قم بتهيئة الإعدادات الخاصة بالحقل (انظر أدناه) diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx index 595ec8f61c..345db9f1e2 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ description: دليل خطوة بخطوة لإنشاء كائنات مخصصة ## الخطوات 1. اذهب إلى **الإعدادات → نموذج البيانات** -2. انقر **+ كائن جديد** +2. انقر فوق **+ إضافة كائن** 3. املأ ما يلي: * **الاسم المفرد** (مثل: "Listing") * **الاسم بصيغة الجمع** (مثل: "Listings") @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ description: دليل خطوة بخطوة لإنشاء كائنات مخصصة تبدأ الكائنات الجديدة بحقول أساسية. أضف حقولًا مخصصة لالتقاط البيانات التي تحتاج إليها: 1. في **الإعدادات → نموذج البيانات**، حدّد كائنك -2. انقر **+ إضافة حقل** +2. انقر فوق **+ حقل جديد** 3. اختر نوع الحقل، قم بإعداده، ثم احفظ اطّلع على [كيفية إنشاء حقول مخصصة](/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields) للحصول على تفاصيل حول أنواع الحقول والإعداد. @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ description: دليل خطوة بخطوة لإنشاء كائنات مخصصة إذا لم تعد بحاجة إلى كائن: -1. اذهب إلى **الإعدادات → نموذج البيانات** -2. بدّل الكائن إلى وضع الإيقاف +1. انتقل إلى **الإعدادات → موديل البيانات → كائن الاختيار → الإعدادات** +2. انقر فوق زر **إلغاء التفعيل** سيتم إخفاء الكائن ولكن سيتم الاحتفاظ بالبيانات. يمكنك إعادة تنشيطه أو حذفه نهائيًا لاحقًا. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx index 0a5144354b..7bda89f489 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ People ←→ Project Assignments ←→ Projects أولًا، أنشئ الكائن الوسيط الذي سيحتفظ بالارتباطات. 1. اذهب إلى **الإعدادات → نموذج البيانات** -2. انقر **+ كائن جديد** +2. انقر فوق **+ إضافة كائن** 3. سمِّه تسمية وصفية (مثلًا: "تعيين مشروع"، "عضو فريق"، "طلب منتج") 4. فعِّل خيار "تخطي إنشاء حقل الاسم" diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx index 7d16681dda..7320171644 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ description: دليل خطوة بخطوة لربط الكائنات باستخد 1. اذهب إلى **الإعدادات → نموذج البيانات** 2. حدّد الكائن الذي تريد فيه العلاقة (عادةً جانب "المتعدد") -3. انقر **+ إضافة حقل** +3. انقر **+ حقل جديد** 4. اختر **علاقة** كنوع الحقل 5. اختر **الكائن المستهدف** 6. اختر **واحد إلى متعدد** أو **متعدد إلى واحد** @@ -42,16 +42,26 @@ description: دليل خطوة بخطوة لربط الكائنات باستخد يمكن الآن ربط كل شخص بشركة، وتعرض كل شركة موظفيها. -## حذف علاقة +## إلغاء تنشيط علاقة -1. اذهب إلى **الإعدادات → نموذج البيانات** -2. اعثر على حقل العلاقة -3. انقر **⋮ → إلغاء التنشيط** +1. اذهب إلى **Settings → Data Model → object of choice** +2. ابحث عن حقل العلاقة وانقر عليه +3. انقر زر **إلغاء التنشيط** تظل الروابط محفوظة لكنها مخفية. أعد التنشيط لاستعادتها. -**حذف العلاقة لا يحذف السجلات.** تتم إزالة الرابط بينهما فقط. +**إلغاء تنشيط علاقة لا يحذف السجلات.** تتم إزالة الرابط بينهما فقط. + + +## حذف علاقة + +1. اذهب إلى **Settings → Data Model → object of choice** +2. ابحث عن حقل العلاقة وانقر عليه +3. انقر زر **حذف** + + +ينطبق فقط على العلاقات المخصصة، يمكن فقط إلغاء تنشيط العلاقات القياسية. ## ذات صلة diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx index 5f8bc6bea1..1cfe99c041 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx @@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ description: الأسئلة الشائعة حول نموذج بيانات Twenty لا، لا يمكن تغيير أنواع الحقول بعد إنشائها. إذا كنت بحاجة إلى نوع مختلف، فأنشئ حقلًا جديدًا بالنوع الصحيح، وانقل بياناتك، ثم عطّل الحقل القديم. - تستخدم واجهة GraphQL كلا النموذجين لعمليات مختلفة: * `createPerson` (مفرد) لأعمال سجلات فردية @@ -73,15 +72,15 @@ description: الأسئلة الشائعة حول نموذج بيانات Twenty -حقول الصيغ قادمة في **الربع الأول من عام 2026**. في الوقت الحالي، يمكنك استخدام سير العمل لحساب وتحديث قيم الحقول تلقائيًا. +حقول الصيغة قادمة في **H2 2026**. في الوقت الحالي، يمكنك استخدام سير العمل لحساب وتحديث قيم الحقول تلقائيًا. -الحقول المتداخلة قادمة في **الربع الأول من عام 2026**. حاليًا، يمكنك استخدام سير العمل لإحضار قيم الحقول من الكائنات ذات الصلة. مثلاً، لعرض صناعة شركة على سجل شخص، قم بإنشاء حقل مخصص للأشخاص واستخدم سير العمل لمزامنة القيمة. +الحقول المتداخلة قادمة في **H2 2026**. حاليًا، يمكنك استخدام سير العمل لإحضار قيم الحقول من الكائنات ذات الصلة. مثلاً، لعرض صناعة شركة على سجل شخص، قم بإنشاء حقل مخصص للأشخاص واستخدم سير العمل لمزامنة القيمة. -سيكون إعادة ترتيب الحقول متاحًا مع التخطيطات المخصصة في **الربع الرابع من عام 2025**. حاليًا، تظهر الحقول بترتيب أبجدي. +نعم، انتقل إلى الإعدادات → نموذج البيانات → كائن من اختيارك → تخطيط وانقر فوق **تخصيص صفحة التسجيل**. إذا تم تعطيل هذا الزر، يجب عليك إنشاء سجل. @@ -93,7 +92,7 @@ description: الأسئلة الشائعة حول نموذج بيانات Twenty -العلاقات عديدة-إلى-عديدة قادمة في **النصف الأول من عام 2026**. حاليًا، أنشئ كائنًا وسيطًا مع علاقتين واحد-إلى-عديد كحل بديل. +العديد من العلاقات تأتي في **H2 2026**. حاليًا، أنشئ كائنًا وسيطًا مع علاقتين واحد-إلى-عديد كحل بديل. على سبيل المثال، لربط People وProjects (عديد-إلى-عديد)، أنشئ كائنًا باسم "Project Assignments" يحتوي على: * علاقة إلى People (عديد من التعيينات → شخص واحد) @@ -147,6 +146,10 @@ description: الأسئلة الشائعة حول نموذج بيانات Twenty حاليًا، لا يوجد تصدير مدمج لتكوين نموذج البيانات. تواصل مع الدعم إذا كنت بحاجة إلى نقل نموذج البيانات بين مساحات العمل. + + +الحد الأقصى لعدد الحقول التي يمكن أن يكون فيها كائن واحد هو 1600 حقل حسب حدود البريد، بما في ذلك الحقول الموجودة والمحذوفة. كن على علم بأن عشرين لن تصلح مساحة العمل الخاصة بك إذا تم الوصول إلى الحد الأقصى من 1600 حقول لأنها تقع في إطار سياستنا للاستخدام العادل. + ## هل تحتاج إلى المزيد من المساعدة؟ diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx index 416c1c0b95..017c0a599c 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx @@ -27,10 +27,6 @@ description: قم بتكوين تسجيل الدخول الأحادي لضمان * وصول المسؤول إلى موفّر الهوية لديك * وصول المسؤول إلى مساحة عمل Twenty - -**للمستخدمين الذين يستضيفون ذاتيًا والراغبين في إعداد SSO**، تواصلوا عبر contact@twenty.com - - ### خطوات التكوين #### 1. الوصول إلى إعدادات SSO @@ -125,5 +121,5 @@ description: قم بتكوين تسجيل الدخول الأحادي لضمان * تفاصيل التكوين (من دون بيانات حساسة) - هل تحتاج إلى إعداد SSO لمؤسستك؟ [اعثر على شريك Twenty معتمد](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso) متخصص في إعداد SSO والهوية. *(تفضّل إشراك Twenty مباشرةً؟ [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com).)* +هل تحتاج إلى إعداد SSO لمؤسستك؟ [اعثر على شريك Twenty معتمد](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso) متخصص في إعداد SSO والهوية. *(تفضّل إشراك Twenty مباشرةً؟ [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com))* diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx index 56b93b0ef6..ee550aeb0d 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx @@ -7,15 +7,14 @@ description: قم بتكوين نطاق مساحة العمل، ونطاقات ## نطاق مساحة العمل -قم بالتكوين ضمن **الإعدادات → عام → نطاق مساحة العمل**. +تكوين تحت **الإعدادات → العام**. قم بتعديل اسم النطاق الفرعي الخاص بك أو عيّن نطاقًا مخصصًا لمساحة العمل. ### تخصيص النطاق -1. انقر **تخصيص النطاق** -2. عدّل نطاقك الفرعي (مثل: `yourcompany.twenty.com`) -3. أو قم بإعداد نطاق مخصص (مثل: `crm.yourcompany.com`) +1. انقر فوق **المجال الفرعي** لتحرير المجال الفرعي الخاص بك (على سبيل المثال `yourcompany.twenty.com`) +2. أو انقر فوق **نطاق مخصص** لإعداد نطاق مخصص (على سبيل المثال `crm.yourcompany.com`) بالنسبة للنطاقات المخصصة، ستحتاج إلى تكوين إعدادات DNS مع مزود النطاق الخاص بك. @@ -45,7 +44,7 @@ description: قم بتكوين نطاق مساحة العمل، ونطاقات ### إضافة نطاق مخصص -1. انقر **إضافة نطاق مخصص** +1. انقر فوق **نطاق مخصص** 2. أدخل النطاق الذي تريد استخدامه (مثل: `app.yourcompany.com`) 3. قم بتكوين إعدادات DNS وفق التعليمات 4. تحقق من النطاق diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx index cbf8eccb05..3f868b3c2c 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ description: دعوة أعضاء الفريق وإدارة الوصول إلى ### استخدام الدعوة عبر البريد الإلكتروني -1. انتقل إلى **الإعدادات → الأعضاء** +1. انتقل إلى **الإعدادات → الأعضاء → دعوة** 2. انقر **+ دعوة** 3. أدخل عنوان البريد الإلكتروني للشخص 4. حدد دورًا للعضو الجديد @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ description: دعوة أعضاء الفريق وإدارة الوصول إلى ### استخدام رابط الدعوة -1. انتقل إلى **الإعدادات → الأعضاء** +1. انتقل إلى **الإعدادات → الأعضاء → دعوة** 2. انسخ رابط دعوة مساحة العمل 3. شارك الرابط مع أعضاء الفريق الجدد 4. سيحصلون على الوصول بمجرد التسجيل @@ -28,10 +28,9 @@ description: دعوة أعضاء الفريق وإدارة الوصول إلى ### عرض جميع الأعضاء -انتقل إلى **الإعدادات → الأعضاء** لمشاهدة: +انتقل إلى **الإعدادات → الاعضاء → فريق** لمشاهدة جميع الاعضاء النشطين -* جميع الأعضاء النشطين -* الدعوات المعلقة +انتقل إلى **الإعدادات → الأعضاء → دعوة** لرؤية الدعوات المعلقة ### تحرير ملف تعريف عضو @@ -56,15 +55,15 @@ description: دعوة أعضاء الفريق وإدارة الوصول إلى ### إزالة عضو 1. انقر على العضو لفتح ملف التعريف الخاص به -2. انقر **حذف** لإزالته من مساحة العمل +2. انقر فوق **حذف الحساب** لإزالتها من مساحة العمل يفقد الأعضاء الذين تمت إزالتهم حق الوصول فورًا. تبقى بياناتهم (السجلات، الملاحظات، المهام) في مساحة العمل. - -**تتم أيضًا إزالة مزامنة البريد الإلكتروني.** إذا كان المستخدم المحذوف هو الوحيد الذي قام بمزامنة رسائل بريد إلكتروني معينة، فستتم إزالة تلك الرسائل نهائيًا من مساحة العمل. - + +رسائل البريد الإلكتروني وأحداث التقويم للمستخدم المحذوف محفوظة ومتاحة للمستخدمين الآخرين. + ## الدعوات المعلقة diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx index 4ab139abbc..3bdb08c69d 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ description: إدارة ملفك الشخصي وإعدادات الأمان ال فعّل المصادقة الثنائية لإضافة طبقة أمان إضافية إلى حسابك: -1. انتقل إلى **الإعدادات → إعدادات الملف الشخصي** -2. انقر على **تمكين المصادقة الثنائية** +1. اذهب إلى **الإعدادات → الملف الشخصي** +2. انقر فوق **تطبيق المصادقة** 3. قم بمسح رمز الاستجابة السريعة باستخدام تطبيق المصادقة الخاص بك 4. أدخل رمز التحقق للتأكيد @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ description: إدارة ملفك الشخصي وإعدادات الأمان ال لحذف حسابك: -1. انتقل إلى **الإعدادات → إعدادات الملف الشخصي** +1. اذهب إلى **الإعدادات → الملف الشخصي** 2. قم بالتمرير إلى **منطقة الخطر** 3. انقر على **حذف الحساب** 4. أكد عن طريق كتابة عنوان بريدك الإلكتروني diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx index fbf4f5a6a2..3ffec00304 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ description: الأسئلة الشائعة حول إعدادات Twenty. -ميزات الوصول المبكر هي إمكانات يُجرى اختبارها قبل الإصدار العام. حاليًا، توجد **لوحات المعلومات** فقط ضمن الوصول المبكر. قد تتغير بناءً على ملاحظات المستخدمين. +ميزات الوصول المبكر هي إمكانات يُجرى اختبارها قبل الإصدار العام. حاليا, فقط **علاقات التقويم** و **عرض يوم التقويم والأسبوع** في وقت مبكر. قد تتغير بناءً على ملاحظات المستخدمين. @@ -162,9 +162,10 @@ description: الأسئلة الشائعة حول إعدادات Twenty. -1. اذهب إلى **الإعدادات → التحديثات → الوصول المبكر** -2. ابحث عن الميزة التي تريدها -3. قم بتفعيلها -4. تصبح الميزة متاحة على الفور +1. انتقل إلى **الإعدادات → المجتمع** +2. مرر لأسفل إلى قسم **الميزات** +3. ابحث عن الميزة التي تريدها +4. قم بتفعيلها +5. تصبح الميزة متاحة على الفور diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx index 2e3bc4776d..9902144ae2 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ description: اعرض السجلات التي تحتوي على حقول تار 1. انتقل إلى كائن يحتوي على حقول تاريخ 2. انقر على القائمة المنسدلة لطريقة العرض → **+ إضافة طريقة عرض** -3. قم بتسمية طريقة العرض الخاصة بك ثم انقر على **إنشاء** +3. اسم العرض الخاص بك وانقر فوق **إنشاء** 4. افتح **الخيارات** على اليمين 5. حدد **التقويم** كتخطيط 6. اختر **حقل التاريخ** لاستخدامه في تحديد موضع السجلات diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx index d31930a93e..48aaa479d5 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ar/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx @@ -26,4 +26,4 @@ description: احصل على مساعدة احترافية لبناء مسارا ### شركاء التنفيذ -اعمل مع شركاء معتمدين من أجل تخصيصات متقدمة. تواصل معنا عبر contact@twenty.com للتواصل مع [شركائنا في التنفيذ](https://twenty.com/partners). +اعمل مع شركاء معتمدين من أجل تخصيصات متقدمة. تواصل معنا عبر [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com) للتواصل مع [شركاء التنفيذ](https://twenty.com/partners). diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx index 9f3fd383d2..79df12936c 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ export default definePageLayout({ ### Hlavní body -* `type` je obvykle `'RECORD_PAGE'` pro úpravu detailního zobrazení konkrétního objektu. +* `type` je jedním z `'RECORD_INDEX'`, `'RECORD_PAGE'`, `'DASHBOARD'` nebo `'STANDALONE_PAGE'`. Použijte `'RECORD_PAGE'` k přizpůsobení detailního zobrazení konkrétního objektu. * `objectUniversalIdentifier` určuje, na který objekt se toto rozvržení vztahuje. * Každá `tab` definuje sekci stránky s `title`, `position` a `layoutMode` (`VERTICAL_LIST` pro stránky záznamů, `GRID` pro řídicí panely). `tab` s jediným widgetem jej automaticky zobrazí přes celou šířku; pokud je widgetů více, řadí se pod sebe jako karty. * Každý `widget` uvnitř karty může vykreslit [front component](/l/cs/developers/extend/apps/layout/front-components), seznam relací nebo jiné vestavěné typy widgetů. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx index c597f9ee59..0dcbf1b8bc 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx @@ -172,6 +172,28 @@ Spusťte `UPDATE core."user" SET "canAccessFullAdminPanel" = TRUE WHERE email = V produkčním prostředí jsou logické funkce ve výchozím nastavení zakázané. Nastavte proměnnou prostředí `LOGIC_FUNCTION_TYPE` na `LOCAL` nebo `LAMBDA`, abyste je povolili. Toto lze nakonfigurovat pomocí proměnných prostředí nebo prostřednictvím proměnných databáze v administračním panelu. Podrobnosti najdete v [průvodci nastavením Logic Functions](/l/cs/developers/self-host/capabilities/setup#logic-functions-available-drivers). +#### Když napíšu zprávu v AI chatu, neodpoví okamžitě a musím aktualizovat stránku, abych viděl odpověď + +Přidat následující blok do nginx konfigurace + +``` +location ~* ^/api/.*stream|\/graphql\/stream { +proxy_pass http://twenty_backend; +proxy_http_version 1.1; +proxy_set_header Connection ""; +proxy_set_header Host $host; +proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-For $proxy_add_x_forwarded_for; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme; +proxy_buffering off; +proxy_request_buffering off; +proxy_cache off; +gzip off; +#chunked_transfer_encoding off; +add_header X-Accel-Buffering no always; +} +``` + ### Docker Compose jedním kliknutím #### Nelze se přihlásit diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/navigation.json b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/navigation.json index 6fe219a401..d258b001cc 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/navigation.json +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/navigation.json @@ -145,6 +145,14 @@ "label": "Návody" } } + }, + "legal": { + "label": "Právní", + "groups": { + "legalHowTos": { + "label": "Návody" + } + } } } }, diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx index dabc5397c0..d99803f146 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Je to v našem plánu. * Mnoho Lidí je propojeno s mnoha Projekty -Relace mnoho ku mnoha jsou plánovány na 1. pololetí 2026. +Mnoho k mnoha vztahům je naplánováno na H2 2026. ## Propojování záznamů během importu diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx index 8571338d9c..59d95bc2db 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Pro přidání vlastního pole k libovolnému objektu postupujte podle těchto k 1. Přejděte na `Nastavení` v levém postranním panelu. 2. Přejděte na `Datový model`, poté zvolte objekt, který chcete přizpůsobit. -3. Pokračujte kliknutím na `Přidat pole`. +3. Pokračujte kliknutím na `+ New Field`. 4. Vyberte název a typ pole, který vyhovuje vašim požadavkům. Zvažte přidání popisu pole pro lepší pochopení. Vaše nově vytvořené pole je nyní dostupné mezi poli aplikace. Pro jeho zobrazení na konkrétním pohledu klikněte na nabídku možností, poté zvolte `Pole`. @@ -78,9 +78,7 @@ Můžete deaktivovat pole, aby bylo skryté v aplikaci, aniž byste ztratili dat Takto to můžete udělat: 1. Najděte pole, které chcete deaktivovat ve vašem nastavení objektu. - 2. Klikněte na tři tečky `⋮` vedle pole pro otevření nabídky. - 3. Zvolte `Deaktivovat` z nabídky. @@ -88,9 +86,7 @@ Takto to můžete udělat: Co se stane, když deaktivujete pole? 1. **V aplikaci:** Pole zmizí a nemůžete k němu přidat nové hodnoty. - 2. **Existující relace:** Pokud se jedná o relační pole, stávající spojení zůstanou, ale nemůžete vytvořit nová. - 3. **Přístup k API:** Stále můžete přistupovat k poli a jeho údajům prostřednictvím API. Můžete znovu aktivovat Standardní a Vlastní pole nebo máte možnost je trvale vymazat. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx index 20db443826..c6328d14f3 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Standardní objekty jsou předdefinované entity ve vašem pracovním prostoru, Objekt `People` ukládá vaše kontakty. Obsahuje kontaktní údaje a historii interakcí, takže vidíte všechny zákaznické interakce na jednom místě. -### Společnost +### Společnosti Objekt `Companies` ukládá vaše firemní účty. Obsahuje podrobnosti jako odvětví, velikost a lokalitu. Společnosti jsou propojené s objekty `People` a `Opportunities`. @@ -47,7 +47,6 @@ Chcete-li vytvořit nový vlastní objekt: 3. Klikněte na `+ Nový objekt` v horní části. Zadejte název (v jednotném i množném čísle), vyberte ikonu a přidejte popis pro svůj vlastní objekt a klikněte na Uložit (vpravo nahoře). Jako příklad vlastního objektu použijte Listing: jednotné číslo by bylo "listing" a množné by bylo "listings" spolu s popisem jako "Inzeráty, které hostitelé vytvořili, aby prezentovali svou nemovitost." - 4. Váš vlastní objekt je nyní vytvořen a zobrazí se v postranním panelu. Můžete do něj hned začít přidávat záznamy. ## Správa objektů @@ -57,18 +56,20 @@ Chcete-li vytvořit nový vlastní objekt: Pokud nepotřebujete standardní nebo vlastní objekt: 1. Přejděte do Nastavení → Datový model -2. Najděte objekt, který chcete deaktivovat -3. Kliknutím na přepínač jej deaktivujte -4. Objekt bude skrytý ve vašem pracovním prostoru, ale data budou zachována +2. Najděte objekt, který chcete deaktivovat, a klikněte na něj +3. Přejít na záložku **Nastavení** objektu +4. Klikněte na tlačítko "Deaktivovat" +5. Objekt bude skrytý ve vašem pracovním prostoru, ale data budou zachována ### Reaktivace objektů Chcete-li obnovit deaktivovaný objekt: 1. Přejděte do Nastavení → Datový model -2. Vyhledejte deaktivované objekty (budou zašedlé) -3. Kliknutím na přepínač jej znovu aktivujte -4. Objekt a všechna jeho data budou obnovena +2. Povolit filtr "Deaktivováno" +3. Hledat deaktivované objekty (mají `deaktivované` vedle jejich jména) +4. Kliknutím na `⋮` a poté na `Activate` jej znovu aktivujete +5. Objekt a všechna jeho data budou obnovena ## Osvědčené postupy diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx index d1ec9cf9a8..c7292dd227 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Vztahy typu mnoho-na-mnoho používají vzor zvaný **spojovací objekt**: zpros -**Experimentální funkce**: Vztahy přes spojovací objekt je před použitím nutné povolit v **Settings → Updates → Lab**. +**Funkce laboratoře**: Před použitím musí být vztahy s Junkcí povoleny v **Nastavení → komunita → Vlastnosti**. Podívejte se na [Jak vytvořit vztahy typu mnoho k mnoha](/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations) pro úplný návod krok za krokem. @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Podívejte se na [Jak vytvořit vztahy typu mnoho k mnoha](/l/cs/user-guide/data 1. Přejděte do **Nastavení → Datový model** 2. Vyberte objekt, do kterého chcete přidat relaci -3. Klikněte na **+ Add Field** +3. Klikněte na **+ Nové pole** 4. Vyberte **Relation** jako typ pole 5. Vyberte cílový objekt nebo objekty, ke kterým chcete relaci vytvořit 6. Nakonfigurujte nastavení relace: diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx index 83715918de..d4dd14a1d4 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Vlastní pole vám umožňují zachytit informace specifické pro vaše podniká 1. Přejděte do **Nastavení → Datový model** 2. Vyberte objekt, ke kterému chcete přidat pole -3. Klikněte na **+ Add Field** +3. Klikněte na **+ nové pole** 4. Zvolte **typ pole** (všechny typy viz [Pole](/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields)) 5. Zadejte **název pole** a volitelný popis 6. Nakonfigurujte nastavení specifická pro dané pole (viz níže) diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx index 8499a697a6..0635a4710a 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Vlastní objekty vám umožňují ukládat informace jedinečné pro vaše podni ## Postup 1. Přejděte do **Nastavení → Datový model** -2. Klikněte na **+ New object** +2. Klikněte na **+ Přidat objekt** 3. Vyplňte: * **Název v jednotném čísle** (např. "Listing") * **Název v množném čísle** (např. "Listings") @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Váš objekt se okamžitě zobrazí v postranním panelu. Nové objekty začínají základními poli. Přidejte vlastní pole, abyste zachytili potřebná data: 1. V **Nastavení → Datový model** vyberte svůj objekt -2. Klikněte na **+ Add Field** +2. Klikněte na **+ nové pole** 3. Vyberte typ pole, nakonfigurujte a uložte Podrobnosti o typech polí a konfiguraci najdete v [Jak vytvořit vlastní pole](/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields). @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ Chcete-li propojit svůj objekt s People, Companies nebo jinými objekty, vytvo Pokud objekt již nepotřebujete: -1. Přejděte do **Nastavení → Datový model** -2. Vypněte objekt +1. Přejděte na **Nastavení → Datový model → předmět výběru → Nastavení** +2. Klikněte na tlačítko **Deaktivovat** Objekt je skrytý, ale data zůstávají zachována. Později jej můžete znovu aktivovat nebo trvale smazat. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx index 2aedcee139..ff3a0a9aa7 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Když povolíte přepínač pro vztah přes spojovací objekt, Twenty zobrazí p Nejprve vytvořte mezilehlý objekt, který bude uchovávat propojení. 1. Přejděte do **Nastavení → Datový model** -2. Klikněte na **+ New object** +2. Klikněte na **+ Přidat objekt** 3. Pojmenujte jej výstižně (např. "Project Assignment", "Team Member", "Product Order") 4. Přepněte "Přeskočit vytvoření pole Název" na zapnuto diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx index 111950019d..12765ae62d 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Viz [Relační pole](/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields) s 1. Přejděte do **Nastavení → Datový model** 2. Vyberte objekt, ve kterém chcete relaci (obvykle strana „mnoho“) -3. Klikněte na **+ Přidat pole** +3. Klikněte na **+ New Field** 4. Vyberte jako typ pole **Relace** 5. Vyberte **cílový objekt** 6. Vyberte **Jedna ku mnoha** nebo **Mnoho ku jedné** @@ -42,16 +42,26 @@ Viz [Relační pole](/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields) s Nyní lze každou osobu propojit se společností a každá společnost zobrazuje své lidi. -## Smazání relace +## Deaktivace relace -1. Přejděte do **Nastavení → Datový model** -2. Najděte relační pole -3. Klikněte na **⋮ → Deaktivovat** +1. Přejděte do **Settings → Data Model → object of choice** +2. Najděte pole relace a klikněte na něj +3. Klikněte na tlačítko **Deactivate** Propojení se zachovají, ale jsou skrytá. Znovu aktivujte pro obnovení. -**Smazání relace nemaže záznamy.** Odstraní se pouze propojení mezi nimi. +**Deaktivace relace nemaže záznamy.** Odstraní se pouze propojení mezi nimi. + + +## Smazání relace + +1. Přejděte do **Settings → Data Model → object of choice** +2. Najděte pole relace a klikněte na něj +3. Klikněte na tlačítko **Delete** + + +Platí pouze pro vlastní relace, standardní relace lze pouze deaktivovat. ## Související diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx index 42125c0d32..465df770ca 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx @@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ Všechny aktivní objekty se zobrazují v navigaci. Objekty, které nepotřebuje Ne, typy polí nelze po vytvoření změnit. Pokud potřebujete jiný typ, vytvořte nové pole se správným typem, migrujte svá data a poté staré pole deaktivujte. - Naše API GraphQL používá obě formy pro různé operace: * `createPerson` (jednotné) pro akce na jednotlivých záznamech @@ -73,15 +72,15 @@ Aktuálně nelze nastavit vlastní pole jako povinná. Všechna pole přijímaj -Vzorcová pole přijdou v **Q1 2026**. Mezitím můžete použít pracovní postupy pro automatické výpočty a aktualizace hodnot polí. +Pole pro vzorce přicházejí v **H2 2026**. Mezitím můžete použít pracovní postupy pro automatické výpočty a aktualizace hodnot polí. -Vnořená pole přijdou v **Q1 2026**. Aktuálně můžete použít pracovní postupy k přenesení hodnot polí z příbuzných objektů. Například k zobrazení odvětví společnosti na záznamu Osoby vytvořte vlastní pole pro Lidi a použijte pracovní postup k synchronizaci hodnoty. +Vložená pole přicházejí v **H2 2026**. Aktuálně můžete použít pracovní postupy k přenesení hodnot polí z příbuzných objektů. Například k zobrazení odvětví společnosti na záznamu Osoby vytvořte vlastní pole pro Lidi a použijte pracovní postup k synchronizaci hodnoty. -Přerovnávání polí bude dostupné s vlastními rozloženími ve **Q4 2025**. Aktuálně se pole zobrazují v abecedním pořadí. +Ano, přejděte do Nastavení → Datový model → předmět dle vašeho výběru → Rozložení a klikněte **Přizpůsobit stránku záznamu**. Pokud je toto tlačítko zakázáno, musíte vytvořit záznam. @@ -93,7 +92,7 @@ Ano! Samo-referenční relace jsou podporovány a doporučeny pro případy pou -Vztahy mnoho-mnoho přijdou v **H1 2026**. Aktuálně jako řešení vytvořte mezilehlý objekt se dvěma vztahy jedno-mnoho. +Člověk k mnoha vztahům přichází v **H2 2026**. Aktuálně jako řešení vytvořte mezilehlý objekt se dvěma vztahy jedno-mnoho. Například pro propojení Lidí a Projektů (mnoho-mnoho) vytvořte objekt "Přiřazení k projektům" s: * Relaci k Lidem (mnoho přiřazení → jedna osoba) @@ -147,6 +146,10 @@ Ano, data CSV můžete importovat do libovolného objektu, včetně vlastních o Aktuálně neexistuje vestavěný export konfigurace datového modelu. Pokud potřebujete migrovat svůj datový model mezi pracovními prostory, kontaktujte podporu. + + +Maximální počet polí, která může mít jeden objekt je 1600 polí podle limitů Postgres, včetně existujících i odstraněných polí. Uvědomte si, že dvacet let neopraví váš pracovní prostor, pokud je dosaženo limitu 1600 polí, protože spadá pod naše zásady spravedlivého využívání. + ## Potřebujete další pomoc? diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx index 5dfe354ad4..634d175eda 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx @@ -27,10 +27,6 @@ Twenty podporuje SSO s: * Administrátorský přístup k vašemu poskytovateli identity * Administrátorský přístup k pracovnímu prostoru Twenty - -**Pro uživatele vlastního hostování, kteří chtějí nastavit SSO**, obraťte se na contact@twenty.com - - ### Kroky konfigurace #### 1. Přístup k nastavení SSO @@ -125,5 +121,5 @@ Pokud narazíte na problémy, kontaktujte podporu s těmito informacemi: * Podrobnosti konfigurace (bez citlivých údajů) - Potřebujete pro svou organizaci nastavit SSO? [Najděte certifikovaného partnera Twenty](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso), který se specializuje na SSO a nastavení identity. *(Raději byste do toho přímo zapojili Twenty? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com).)* +Potřebujete pro svou organizaci nastavit SSO? [Najděte certifikovaného partnera Twenty](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso), který se specializuje na SSO a nastavení identity. *(Raději byste do toho přímo zapojili Twenty? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com))* diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx index c06e34657a..e3d748f14c 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx @@ -7,15 +7,14 @@ Nastavení domény se nachází na třech místech v závislosti na tom, co prá ## Doména pracovního prostoru -Nastavte v **Nastavení → Obecné → Doména pracovního prostoru**. +Konfigurovat v **Nastavení → Obecně**. Upravte název své subdomény nebo nastavte vlastní doménu pro svůj pracovní prostor. ### Přizpůsobit doménu -1. Klikněte na **Přizpůsobit doménu** -2. Upravte svou subdoménu (např. `yourcompany.twenty.com`) -3. Nebo nastavte vlastní doménu (např. `crm.yourcompany.com`) +1. Klikněte na **Subdoména** pro úpravu své subdomény (např. `yourcompany.twenty.com`) +2. Nebo klikněte na **vlastní doména** pro nastavení vlastní domény (např. `crm.yourcompany.com`) U vlastních domén budete muset u svého poskytovatele domény nakonfigurovat nastavení DNS. @@ -45,7 +44,7 @@ Aplikace, které na webu zpřístupňují routy, jsou dostupné z vyhrazené adr ### Přidat vlastní doménu -1. Klikněte na **Přidat vlastní doménu** +1. Klikněte na **vlastní domény** 2. Zadejte doménu, kterou chcete použít (např. `app.yourcompany.com`) 3. Nakonfigurujte nastavení DNS podle pokynů 4. Ověřte doménu diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx index e5a7755d10..15452b9ce4 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Spravujte, kdo má přístup do vašeho pracovního prostoru, v **Nastavení → ### Použití e-mailové pozvánky -1. Přejděte na **Nastavení → Členové** +1. Přejděte na **Nastavení → Členové → Pozvat** 2. Klikněte na **+ Pozvat** 3. Zadejte emailovou adresu osoby 4. Vyberte roli pro nového člena @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Pozvaná osoba obdrží e-mail s odkazem pro připojení k vašemu pracovnímu p ### Použití odkazu k pozvání -1. Přejděte na **Nastavení → Členové** +1. Přejděte na **Nastavení → Členové → Pozvat** 2. Zkopírujte pozvánkový odkaz pracovního prostoru 3. Sdílejte odkaz s novými členy týmu 4. Získají přístup, jakmile se zaregistrují @@ -28,10 +28,9 @@ Pozvaná osoba obdrží e-mail s odkazem pro připojení k vašemu pracovnímu p ### Zobrazení všech členů -Přejděte na **Nastavení → Členové**, kde uvidíte: +Přejděte do **Nastavení → Členové → Tým** pro zobrazení všech aktivních členů -* Všichni aktivní členové -* Čekající pozvánky +Přejděte do **Nastavení → Členové → Pozvání** a uvidíte čekající pozvánky ### Úprava profilu člena @@ -56,15 +55,15 @@ Na stránce profilu člena: ### Odebrat člena 1. Klikněte na člena a otevřete jeho profil -2. Klikněte na **Smazat**, abyste jej odebrali z pracovního prostoru +2. Klikněte na **Odstranit účet** pro odstranění z pracovního prostoru Odebraní členové okamžitě ztratí přístup. Jejich data (záznamy, poznámky, úkoly) v pracovním prostoru zůstávají. - -**Synchronizace e-mailu je také odstraněna.** Pokud byl smazaný uživatel jediný, kdo synchronizoval určité e-maily, tyto e-maily budou z pracovního prostoru trvale odstraněny. - + +E-maily a události kalendáře smazaného uživatele jsou archivovány a dostupné ostatním uživatelům. + ## Čekající pozvánky diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx index 2f611c66bc..b2d763cadf 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ description: Spravujte svůj osobní profil a nastavení zabezpečení. Povolte 2FA pro přidání další vrstvy zabezpečení na váš účet: -1. Přejděte na **Nastavení → Nastavení profilu** -2. Klikněte na **Povolit 2FA** +1. Přejděte na **Nastavení → Profil** +2. Klikněte na **Autentizační aplikaci** 3. Naskenujte QR kód pomocí vaší autentizační aplikace 4. Zadejte ověřovací kód pro potvrzení @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Smazáním účtu trvale ztratíte přístup ke všem pracovním prostorům. Tat Pro smazání účtu: -1. Přejděte na **Nastavení → Nastavení profilu** +1. Přejděte na **Nastavení → Profil** 2. Přejděte na **Nebezpečná zóna** 3. Klikněte na **Smazat účet** 4. Potvrďte zadáním své e-mailové adresy diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx index d33568e2bc..fab17c9453 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Můžete nastavit schválené přístupové domény tak, aby se členové týmu -Funkce v předběžném přístupu se testují před obecnou dostupností. Aktuálně jsou v předběžném přístupu pouze **Řídicí panely**. Mohou se změnit na základě zpětné vazby od uživatelů. +Funkce v předběžném přístupu se testují před obecnou dostupností. V současné době jsou v raném přístupu pouze **vztahy mezi červencem** a **Kalendářním dnem a týdnem**. Mohou se změnit na základě zpětné vazby od uživatelů. @@ -162,9 +162,10 @@ Funkce v předběžném přístupu jsou funkční, ale mohou se změnit na zákl -1. Přejděte do **Nastavení → Aktualizace → Předběžný přístup** -2. Najděte požadovanou funkci -3. Přepněte ji na zapnuto -4. Funkce se okamžitě zpřístupní +1. Přejít do **Nastavení → Komunity** +2. Přejít dolů na část **Vlastnosti** +3. Najděte požadovanou funkci +4. Přepněte ji na zapnuto +5. Funkce se okamžitě zpřístupní diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx index 4fc8d316a2..6ea03350a0 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Zobrazení kalendáře zobrazuje vaše záznamy v kalendáři podle pole s datem 1. Přejděte k objektu s poli typu datum 2. Klikněte na rozbalovací nabídku zobrazení → **+ Přidat zobrazení** -3. Pojmenujte zobrazení a klikněte na **Vytvořit** +3. Pojmenuj tvůj pohled a klikni na **Vytvořit** 4. Otevřete **Možnosti** vpravo 5. Vyberte **Kalendář** jako rozložení 6. Zvolte **pole s datem**, které se použije pro umístění záznamů diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx index 968d5d9439..881998a124 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/cs/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx @@ -26,4 +26,4 @@ Získejte pomoc od našeho hlavního týmu s našimi 4hodinovými [Úvodními ba ### Implementační partneři -Spolupracujte s certifikovanými partnery na pokročilých úpravách. Kontaktujte nás na contact@twenty.com pro spojení s našimi [implementačními partnery](https://twenty.com/partners). +Spolupracujte s certifikovanými partnery na pokročilých úpravách. Kontaktujte nás na [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com), abyste se spojili s našimi [implementačními partnery](https://twenty.com/partners). diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx index 016a274af4..a7309da0ed 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ export default definePageLayout({ ### Hauptpunkte -* `type` ist typischerweise `'RECORD_PAGE'`, um die Detailansicht eines bestimmten Objekts anzupassen. +* `type` ist eines von `'RECORD_INDEX'`, `'RECORD_PAGE'`, `'DASHBOARD'` oder `'STANDALONE_PAGE'`. Verwenden Sie `'RECORD_PAGE'`, um die Detailansicht eines bestimmten Objekts anzupassen. * `objectUniversalIdentifier` gibt an, auf welches Objekt dieses Layout angewendet wird. * Jeder `tab` definiert einen Abschnitt der Seite mit `title`, `position` und `layoutMode` (`VERTICAL_LIST` für Datensatzseiten, `GRID` für Dashboards). Ein Tab mit einem einzelnen Widget rendert dieses automatisch in voller Breite; bei mehreren Widgets werden diese als Karten gestapelt. * Jedes `widget` innerhalb eines Tabs kann eine [Frontend-Komponente](/l/de/developers/extend/apps/layout/front-components), eine Relationenliste oder andere eingebaute Widget-Typen rendern. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx index 6dd8650edf..4e60eb332c 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx @@ -171,6 +171,28 @@ Führen Sie den folgenden Befehl im Datenbankcontainer aus, um Zugriff auf das A In der Produktion sind Logikfunktionen standardmäßig deaktiviert. Setzen Sie die Umgebungsvariable `LOGIC_FUNCTION_TYPE` auf `LOCAL` oder `LAMBDA`, um sie zu aktivieren. Dies kann über Umgebungsvariablen oder über die Datenbankvariablen des Admin-Panels konfiguriert werden. Details finden Sie im [Leitfaden zur Einrichtung von Logikfunktionen](/l/de/developers/self-host/capabilities/setup#logic-functions-available-drivers). +#### Wenn ich eine Nachricht im AI-Chat eingebe, antwortet sie nicht sofort und ich muss die Seite aktualisieren, um die Antwort zu sehen + +Folgenden Block zur nginx config hinzufügen + +``` +location ~* ^/api/.*stream|\/graphql\/stream { +proxy_pass http://twenty_backend; +proxy_http_version 1.1; +proxy_set_header Connection ""; +proxy_set_header Host $host; +proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-For $proxy_add_x_forwarded_for; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme; +proxy_buffering off; +proxy_request_buffering off; +proxy_cache off; +gzip off; +#chunked_transfer_encoding off; +add_header X-Accel-Buffering no always; +} +``` + ### 1-Klick Docker Compose #### Kann mich nicht einloggen diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/navigation.json b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/navigation.json index 3266e75ced..df398a911d 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/navigation.json +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/navigation.json @@ -145,6 +145,14 @@ "label": "Anleitungen" } } + }, + "legal": { + "label": "Rechtliches", + "groups": { + "legalHowTos": { + "label": "Anleitungen" + } + } } } }, diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx index 081839246b..1243800af1 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Dies steht auf unserer Roadmap. * Viele Personen mit vielen Projekten verknüpft sind -Viele-zu-viele-Beziehungen sind für H1 2026 geplant. +Viele zu viele Beziehungen sind für H2 2026 geplant. ## Datensätze während des Imports verknüpfen diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx index 84b4417ccd..600618b511 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Um ein benutzerdefiniertes Feld zu einem Objekt hinzuzufügen, folgen Sie diesen 1. Gehen Sie zu `Einstellungen` in der linken Seitenleiste. 2. Gehen Sie zu `Datenmodell`, und wählen Sie das Objekt, das Sie anpassen möchten. -3. Fahren Sie fort, indem Sie auf `Feld hinzufügen` klicken. +3. Fahren Sie fort, indem Sie auf `+ New Field` klicken. 4. Wählen Sie einen Feldnamen und -typ, der Ihren Anforderungen entspricht. Erwägen Sie, eine Feldbeschreibung hinzuzufügen, um ein besseres Verständnis zu erzielen. Ihr neu erstelltes Feld ist jetzt in den Feldern der Applikation verfügbar. Um es in einer bestimmten Ansicht anzuzeigen, klicken Sie auf das Optionsmenü und wählen Sie dann `Felder`. @@ -78,9 +78,7 @@ Sie können ein Feld deaktivieren, um es in der App zu verbergen, ohne Ihre Date So können Sie es tun: 1. Suchen Sie das Feld, das Sie in Ihren Objekteinstellungen deaktivieren möchten. - 2. Klicken Sie auf die drei Punkte `⋮` neben dem Feld, um das Menü zu öffnen. - 3. Wählen Sie `Deaktivieren` im Dropdown-Menü aus. @@ -88,9 +86,7 @@ So können Sie es tun: Was passiert, wenn Sie ein Feld deaktivieren? 1. **In der App:** Das Feld verschwindet und Sie können ihm keine neuen Werte hinzufügen. - 2. **Bestehende Beziehungen:** Wenn es ein Relationsfeld ist, bleiben bestehende Verbindungen bestehen, aber Sie können keine neuen anlegen. - 3. **API-Zugriff:** Sie können weiterhin über die API auf das Feld und seine Daten zugreifen. Sie können Standard- und benutzerdefinierte Felder reaktivieren oder sie dauerhaft löschen. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx index b8d361af3b..6593324640 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx @@ -47,7 +47,6 @@ Um ein neues benutzerdefiniertes Objekt zu erstellen: 3. Klicken Sie oben auf `+ Neues Objekt`. Geben Sie den Namen (sowohl im Singular als auch im Plural) ein, wählen Sie ein Symbol aus und fügen Sie eine Beschreibung für Ihr benutzerdefiniertes Objekt hinzu und drücken Sie Speichern (oben rechts). Als Beispiel für ein benutzerdefiniertes Objekt wäre der Singular "Eintrag" und der Plural "Einträge" zusammen mit einer Beschreibung wie "Einträge, die Gastgeber erstellt haben, um ihre Immobilie zu präsentieren." - 4. Ihr benutzerdefiniertes Objekt ist jetzt erstellt und wird in Ihrer Seitenleiste angezeigt. Sie können sofort damit beginnen, Datensätze hinzuzufügen. ## Objekte verwalten @@ -57,18 +56,20 @@ Um ein neues benutzerdefiniertes Objekt zu erstellen: Wenn Sie ein Standard- oder benutzerdefiniertes Objekt nicht benötigen: 1. Gehen Sie zu Einstellungen → Datenmodell -2. Suchen Sie das Objekt, das Sie deaktivieren möchten -3. Klicken Sie auf den Schalter, um es zu deaktivieren -4. Das Objekt wird in Ihrem Arbeitsbereich ausgeblendet, die Daten bleiben jedoch erhalten +2. Finde das Objekt, das du deaktivieren möchtest und klicke es +3. Gehe zur Registerkarte **Einstellungen** des Objekts +4. Klicke auf "Deaktivieren" +5. Das Objekt wird in Ihrem Arbeitsbereich ausgeblendet, die Daten bleiben jedoch erhalten ### Objekte reaktivieren So stellen Sie ein deaktiviertes Objekt wieder her: 1. Gehen Sie zu Einstellungen → Datenmodell -2. Suchen Sie nach deaktivierten Objekten (sie sind ausgegraut) -3. Klicken Sie auf den Schalter, um es zu reaktivieren -4. Das Objekt und all seine Daten werden wiederhergestellt +2. Aktiviere `Deaktiviert` Filter +3. Suche nach deaktivierten Objekten (sie haben `Deaktiviert` neben ihrem Namen) +4. Klicken Sie auf `⋮` und dann auf `Activate`, um es zu reaktivieren +5. Das Objekt und all seine Daten werden wiederhergestellt ## Beste Praktiken diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx index ade146267b..e137b31c07 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Viele-zu-viele-Beziehungen verwenden ein **Verknüpfungsobjekt**-Muster: ein Zwi -**Lab-Funktion**: Verknüpfungsbeziehungen müssen vor der Verwendung unter **Einstellungen → Updates → Lab** aktiviert werden. +**Labor-Eigenschaft**: Abzweigungsbeziehungen müssen vor der Verwendung unter **Einstellungen → Community → Funktionen** aktiviert sein. Siehe [Viele-zu-Viele-Beziehungen erstellen](/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations) für eine vollständige Schritt-für-Schritt-Anleitung. @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Siehe [Viele-zu-Viele-Beziehungen erstellen](/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos 1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Datenmodell** 2. Wählen Sie das Objekt aus, dem Sie die Beziehung hinzufügen möchten -3. Klicken Sie auf **+ Feld hinzufügen** +3. Klicke **+ Neues Feld** 4. Wählen Sie **Relation** als Feldtyp 5. Wählen Sie die Zielobjekte aus, zu denen die Beziehung hergestellt werden soll 6. Konfigurieren Sie die Relationseinstellungen: diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx index 9dc7fbdf2f..b77d175c5d 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Benutzerdefinierte Felder ermöglichen es Ihnen, Informationen zu erfassen, die 1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Datenmodell** 2. Wählen Sie das Objekt aus, dem Sie ein Feld hinzufügen möchten -3. Klicken Sie auf **+ Feld hinzufügen** +3. Klicke **+ neues Feld** 4. Wählen Sie einen **Feldtyp** (siehe [Felder](/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields) für alle Typen) 5. Geben Sie den **Feldnamen** und eine optionale Beschreibung ein 6. Konfigurieren Sie feldspezifische Einstellungen (siehe unten) diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx index 9af5d57393..a890186494 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Benutzerdefinierte Objekte ermöglichen es Ihnen, Informationen zu speichern, di ## Schritte 1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Datenmodell** -2. Klicken Sie auf **+ Neues Objekt** +2. Klicke **+ Objekt hinzufügen** 3. Füllen Sie Folgendes aus: * **Singularname** (z. B. "Listing") * **Pluralname** (z. B. "Listings") @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Ihr Objekt erscheint sofort in der Seitenleiste. Neue Objekte beginnen mit grundlegenden Feldern. Fügen Sie benutzerdefinierte Felder hinzu, um die benötigten Daten zu erfassen: 1. Wählen Sie in **Einstellungen → Datenmodell** Ihr Objekt aus -2. Klicken Sie auf **+ Feld hinzufügen** +2. Klicke **+ neues Feld** 3. Wählen Sie einen Feldtyp, konfigurieren Sie ihn und speichern Sie Siehe [Benutzerdefinierte Felder erstellen](/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields) für Details zu Feldtypen und Konfiguration. @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ Um Ihr Objekt mit Personen, Unternehmen oder anderen Objekten zu verknüpfen, er Wenn Sie ein Objekt nicht mehr benötigen: -1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Datenmodell** -2. Deaktivieren Sie das Objekt +1. Gehe zu **Einstellungen → Datenmodell → Objekt der Wahl → Einstellungen** +2. Klicke auf den **Deaktivieren** Button Das Objekt wird ausgeblendet, die Daten bleiben jedoch erhalten. Sie können es später reaktivieren oder dauerhaft löschen. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx index 898c7e605f..6c20e89146 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Wenn Sie den Schalter für die Verknüpfungsbeziehung aktivieren, zeigt Twenty v Erstellen Sie zunächst das Zwischenobjekt, das die Verknüpfungen speichert. 1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Datenmodell** -2. Klicken Sie auf **+ Neues Objekt** +2. Klicke **+ Objekt hinzufügen** 3. Benennen Sie es aussagekräftig (z. B. "Projektzuweisung", "Teammitglied", "Produktbestellung") 4. Schalten Sie "Erstellen eines Namensfelds überspringen" ein diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx index 5b314ff6ec..dc0b8ab3d3 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Siehe [Relationsfelder](/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields 1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Datenmodell** 2. Wählen Sie das Objekt aus, in dem Sie die Relation benötigen (typischerweise die "Many"-Seite) -3. Klicken Sie auf **+ Feld hinzufügen** +3. Klicken Sie auf **+ Neues Feld** 4. Wählen Sie **Relation** als Feldtyp aus 5. Wählen Sie das **Zielobjekt** aus 6. Wählen Sie **One-to-Many** oder **Many-to-One** @@ -42,16 +42,26 @@ Siehe [Relationsfelder](/l/de/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields Jetzt kann jede Person mit einem Unternehmen verknüpft werden, und jedes Unternehmen zeigt seine Mitarbeitenden. -## Eine Relation löschen +## Eine Relation deaktivieren -1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Datenmodell** -2. Suchen Sie das Relationsfeld -3. Klicken Sie auf **⋮ → Deaktivieren** +1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Datenmodell → gewünschtes Objekt** +2. Suchen Sie das Relationsfeld und klicken Sie darauf +3. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche **Deaktivieren** Verknüpfungen bleiben erhalten, sind jedoch verborgen. Reaktivieren, um wiederherzustellen. -**Das Löschen einer Relation löscht keine Datensätze.** Es wird nur die Verknüpfung zwischen ihnen entfernt. +**Das Deaktivieren einer Relation löscht keine Datensätze.** Es wird nur die Verknüpfung zwischen ihnen entfernt. + + +## Eine Relation löschen + +1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Datenmodell → gewünschtes Objekt** +2. Suchen Sie das Relationsfeld und klicken Sie darauf +3. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche **Löschen** + + +Gilt nur für benutzerdefinierte Relationen, Standardrelationen können nur deaktiviert werden. ## Verwandt diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx index 0e9ea69ec2..c68227cf76 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx @@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ Alle aktiven Objekte erscheinen in der Navigation. Sie können Objekte, die Sie Nein, Feldtypen können nach der Erstellung nicht geändert werden. Wenn Sie einen anderen Typ benötigen, erstellen Sie ein neues Feld mit dem richtigen Typ, migrieren Sie Ihre Daten und deaktivieren Sie anschließend das alte Feld. - Unsere GraphQL-API verwendet beide Formen für verschiedene Operationen: * `createPerson` (Singular) für Einzelaktionen @@ -73,15 +72,15 @@ Derzeit können benutzerdefinierte Felder nicht als erforderlich festgelegt werd -Formelfelder kommen im **1. Quartal 2026**. In der Zwischenzeit können Sie Workflows verwenden, um Feldwerte automatisch zu berechnen und zu aktualisieren. +Formel Felder kommen in **H2 2026**. In der Zwischenzeit können Sie Workflows verwenden, um Feldwerte automatisch zu berechnen und zu aktualisieren. -Verschachtelte Felder kommen im **1. Quartal 2026**. Aktuell können Sie Workflows verwenden, um Felderwerte von verwandten Objekten einzuholen. Zum Beispiel: Um die Branche eines Unternehmens in einem Personen-Datensatz anzuzeigen, erstellen Sie ein benutzerdefiniertes Feld für Personen und verwenden Sie einen Workflow, um den Wert zu synchronisieren. +Verschachtelte Felder kommen in **H2 2026**. Aktuell können Sie Workflows verwenden, um Felderwerte von verwandten Objekten einzuholen. Zum Beispiel: Um die Branche eines Unternehmens in einem Personen-Datensatz anzuzeigen, erstellen Sie ein benutzerdefiniertes Feld für Personen und verwenden Sie einen Workflow, um den Wert zu synchronisieren. -Feld-Umsortierung wird mit benutzerdefinierten Layouts im **4. Quartal 2025** verfügbar sein. Derzeit werden Felder in alphabetischer Reihenfolge angezeigt. +Ja, gehen Sie zu Einstellungen → Datenmodell → Objekt Ihrer Wahl → Layout und klicken Sie auf **Datensatzseite anpassen**. Wenn diese Schaltfläche deaktiviert ist, müssen Sie einen Datensatz erstellen. @@ -93,7 +92,7 @@ Ja! Sich selbst referenzierende Beziehungen werden unterstützt und für Anwendu -Viele-zu-Viele-Beziehungen kommen im **H1 2026**. Derzeit können Sie als Workaround ein Zwischenobjekt mit zwei 1-zu-viele-Beziehungen erstellen. +In **H2 2026** kommen viele Beziehungen. Derzeit können Sie als Workaround ein Zwischenobjekt mit zwei 1-zu-viele-Beziehungen erstellen. Erstellen Sie beispielsweise, um People und Projects (Viele-zu-Viele) zu verknüpfen, ein Objekt "Projektzuweisungen" mit: * Eine Beziehung zu People (viele Zuweisungen → eine Person) @@ -147,6 +146,10 @@ Ja, Sie können CSV-Daten in jedes Objekt importieren, einschließlich benutzerd Derzeit gibt es keinen integrierten Export für die Datenmodell-Konfiguration. Kontaktieren Sie den Support, wenn Sie Ihr Datenmodell zwischen Workspaces migrieren müssen. + + +Die maximale Anzahl von Feldern, die ein einzelnes Objekt haben kann, ist 1600 Felder pro Postgres-Limit, einschließlich vorhandener und gelöschter Felder. Bitte beachten Sie, dass Zwanzig Ihren Arbeitsbereich nicht reparieren kann, wenn ein Limit von 1600 Feldern erreicht wird, da es unter unsere Richtlinien zur fairen Nutzung fällt. + ## Brauchen Sie mehr Hilfe? diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx index ee401d6ff3..bab0c03935 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx @@ -27,10 +27,6 @@ Twenty unterstützt SSO mit: * Administratorzugriff auf Ihren Identitätsanbieter * Administratorzugriff auf den Twenty-Arbeitsbereich - -**Für Self-Hosting-Nutzer, die SSO einrichten möchten**, wenden Sie sich an contact@twenty.com - - ### Konfigurationsschritte #### 1. SSO-Einstellungen aufrufen @@ -125,5 +121,5 @@ Wenn Sie auf Probleme stoßen, wenden Sie sich mit Folgendem an den Support: * Konfigurationsdetails (ohne vertrauliche Daten) - Benötigen Sie eine SSO-Konfiguration für Ihre Organisation? [Finden Sie einen zertifizierten Twenty-Partner](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso), der auf SSO und Identitätseinrichtung spezialisiert ist. *(Sie möchten Twenty lieber direkt einbeziehen? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com).)* +Benötigen Sie eine SSO-Konfiguration für Ihre Organisation? [Finden Sie einen zertifizierten Twenty-Partner](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso), der auf SSO und Identitätseinrichtung spezialisiert ist. *(Sie möchten Twenty lieber direkt einbeziehen? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com))* diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx index 68c9b9802a..de16186703 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx @@ -7,15 +7,14 @@ Domain-Einstellungen befinden sich an drei Stellen, abhängig davon, was Sie kon ## Arbeitsbereichsdomäne -Konfigurieren Sie dies unter **Einstellungen → Allgemein → Arbeitsbereichs-Domain**. +Konfigurieren Sie unter **Einstellungen → Allgemein**. Bearbeiten Sie den Namen Ihrer Subdomäne oder legen Sie eine benutzerdefinierte Domäne für Ihren Arbeitsbereich fest. ### Domäne anpassen -1. Klicken Sie auf **Domäne anpassen** -2. Bearbeiten Sie Ihre Subdomäne (z. B. `yourcompany.twenty.com`) -3. Oder richten Sie eine benutzerdefinierte Domäne ein (z. B. `crm.yourcompany.com`) +1. Klicke **Subdomain** um deine Subdomain zu bearbeiten (z.B. `yourcompany.twenty.com`) +2. Oder klicke **Benutzerdefinierte Domain** um eine eigene Domain einzurichten (z.B. `crm.yourcompany.com`) Für benutzerdefinierte Domänen müssen Sie die DNS-Einstellungen bei Ihrem Domänenanbieter konfigurieren. @@ -45,7 +44,7 @@ Apps, die Routen im Web bereitstellen, werden von einer dedizierten URL ausgelie ### Benutzerdefinierte Domäne hinzufügen -1. Klicken Sie auf **Benutzerdefinierte Domäne hinzufügen** +1. Klicke **Benutzerdefinierte Domain** 2. Geben Sie die Domäne ein, die Sie verwenden möchten (z. B. `app.yourcompany.com`) 3. Konfigurieren Sie die DNS-Einstellungen gemäß Anleitung 4. Überprüfen Sie die Domäne diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx index 226c3cc6a3..878c3107e7 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Verwalten Sie unter **Einstellungen → Mitglieder**, wer Zugriff auf Ihren Arbe ### Verwendung der E-Mail-Einladung -1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Mitglieder** +1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Mitglieder → Einladen** 2. Klicken Sie auf **+ Einladen** 3. Geben Sie die E-Mail-Adresse der Person ein 4. Wählen Sie eine Rolle für das neue Mitglied aus @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Die eingeladene Person erhält eine E-Mail mit einem Link, um Ihrem Arbeitsberei ### Verwendung des Einladungslinks -1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Mitglieder** +1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Mitglieder → Einladen** 2. Kopieren Sie den Einladungslink für den Arbeitsbereich 3. Teilen Sie den Link mit neuen Teammitgliedern 4. Sie erhalten Zugriff, sobald sie sich anmelden @@ -28,10 +28,9 @@ Die eingeladene Person erhält eine E-Mail mit einem Link, um Ihrem Arbeitsberei ### Alle Mitglieder anzeigen -Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Mitglieder**, um Folgendes zu sehen: +Gehe zu **Einstellungen → Mitglieder → Team** um alle aktiven Mitglieder zu sehen -* Alle aktiven Mitglieder -* Ausstehende Einladungen +Gehe zu **Einstellungen → Mitglieder → Einladungen** um ausstehende Einladungen zu sehen ### Profil eines Mitglieds bearbeiten @@ -56,15 +55,15 @@ Auf der Profilseite des Mitglieds: ### Mitglied entfernen 1. Klicken Sie auf das Mitglied, um dessen Profil zu öffnen -2. Klicken Sie auf **Löschen**, um es aus dem Arbeitsbereich zu entfernen +2. Klicke **Konto löschen** um es aus dem Arbeitsbereich zu entfernen Entfernte Mitglieder verlieren den Zugriff sofort. Ihre Daten (Datensätze, Notizen, Aufgaben) bleiben im Arbeitsbereich erhalten. - -**Die E-Mail-Synchronisierung wird ebenfalls entfernt.** Wenn der gelöschte Benutzer der Einzige war, der bestimmte E-Mails synchronisiert hat, werden diese E-Mails dauerhaft aus dem Arbeitsbereich entfernt. - + +E-Mails und Kalenderereignisse des gelöschten Benutzers sind archiviert und für andere Benutzer verfügbar. + ## Ausstehende Einladungen diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx index 13ce320fba..dcca369d73 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ description: Verwalten Sie Ihr persönliches Profil und Ihre Sicherheitseinstell Aktivieren Sie 2FA, um Ihrem Konto eine zusätzliche Sicherheitsebene hinzuzufügen: -1. Gehe zu **Einstellungen → Profileinstellungen** -2. Klicken Sie auf **2FA aktivieren** +1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Profil** +2. Klicken Sie auf **Authentifikator-App** 3. Scannen Sie den QR-Code mit Ihrer Authentifizierungs-App 4. Geben Sie den Bestätigungscode ein, um zu bestätigen @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Wenn Sie Ihr Konto löschen, wird Ihr Zugriff auf alle Arbeitsbereiche dauerhaft Um Ihr Konto zu löschen: -1. Gehe zu **Einstellungen → Profileinstellungen** +1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Profil** 2. Scrollen Sie zu **Gefahrenbereich** 3. Klicken Sie auf **Konto löschen** 4. Bestätigen Sie, indem Sie Ihre E-Mail-Adresse eingeben diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx index 05d7baabdf..92ff752501 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Sie können genehmigte Zugriffsdomänen konfigurieren, damit Teammitglieder mit -Early-Access-Funktionen sind Funktionen, die vor der allgemeinen Verfügbarkeit getestet werden. Derzeit befinden sich nur **Dashboards** im Early Access. Sie können sich basierend auf Benutzerfeedback ändern. +Early-Access-Funktionen sind Funktionen, die vor der allgemeinen Verfügbarkeit getestet werden. Momentan sind nur **Junction Relations** und **Kalendertag und Wochenansichten** im frühen Zugang. Sie können sich basierend auf Benutzerfeedback ändern. @@ -162,9 +162,10 @@ Early-Access-Funktionen sind funktionsfähig, können sich jedoch basierend auf -1. Gehen Sie zu **Einstellungen → Updates → Early Access** -2. Suchen Sie die gewünschte Funktion -3. Aktivieren Sie sie -4. Die Funktion ist sofort verfügbar +1. Gehe zu **Einstellungen → Community** +2. Scrollen Sie zum Abschnitt **Features** +3. Suchen Sie die gewünschte Funktion +4. Aktivieren Sie sie +5. Die Funktion ist sofort verfügbar diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx index 4456aefd95..a3d48c8bce 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Die Kalenderansicht zeigt Ihre Datensätze in einem Kalender basierend auf einem 1. Navigieren Sie zu einem Objekt mit Datumsfeldern 2. Klicken Sie auf das Ansichts-Dropdown → **+ Ansicht hinzufügen** -3. Benennen Sie Ihre Ansicht und klicken Sie auf **Erstellen** +3. Benenne deine Ansicht und klicke auf **Erstellen** 4. Öffnen Sie rechts die **Optionen** 5. Wählen Sie **Kalender** als Layout 6. Wählen Sie das **Datumsfeld**, das für die Positionierung der Datensätze verwendet werden soll diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx index d3b484c049..fa3e969b90 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/de/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx @@ -26,4 +26,4 @@ Holen Sie sich Unterstützung von unserem Kernteam mit unseren 4-stündigen [Ein ### Implementierungspartner -Arbeiten Sie mit zertifizierten Partnern für erweiterte Anpassungen. Kontaktieren Sie uns unter contact@twenty.com, um mit unseren [Implementierungspartnern](https://twenty.com/partners) in Verbindung zu treten. +Arbeiten Sie mit zertifizierten Partnern für erweiterte Anpassungen. Kontaktieren Sie uns unter [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com), um mit unseren [Implementierungspartnern](https://twenty.com/partners) in Kontakt zu treten. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx index 962ec4c392..09eab6044d 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ export default definePageLayout({ ### Puntos clave -* `type` suele ser `'RECORD_PAGE'` para personalizar la vista de detalles de un objeto específico. +* `type` es uno de `'RECORD_INDEX'`, `'RECORD_PAGE'`, `'DASHBOARD'` o `'STANDALONE_PAGE'`. Use `'RECORD_PAGE'` para personalizar la vista de detalles de un objeto específico. * `objectUniversalIdentifier` especifica a qué objeto se aplica este diseño. * Cada `tab` define una sección de la página con un `title`, `position` y `layoutMode` (`VERTICAL_LIST` para páginas de registros, `GRID` para paneles). Una pestaña que contiene un solo widget lo muestra automáticamente a todo lo ancho; con varios widgets, se apilan como tarjetas. * Cada `widget` dentro de una pestaña puede renderizar un [componente de frontend](/l/es/developers/extend/apps/layout/front-components), una lista de relaciones u otros tipos de widget integrados. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx index d9a4693bb2..af5e344b77 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx @@ -171,6 +171,28 @@ Ejecute `UPDATE core."user" SET "canAccessFullAdminPanel" = TRUE WHERE email = ' En producción, las funciones lógicas están deshabilitadas de forma predeterminada. Configura la variable de entorno `LOGIC_FUNCTION_TYPE` en `LOCAL` o `LAMBDA` para habilitarlas. Esto se puede configurar mediante variables de entorno o a través de las variables de base de datos del panel de administración. Consulta la [guía de configuración de funciones lógicas](/l/es/developers/self-host/capabilities/setup#logic-functions-available-drivers) para obtener más detalles. +#### Cuando escribo un mensaje en un chat de IA, no responde inmediatamente y debo actualizar la página para ver la respuesta + +Añadir bloque siguiente a la configuración de nginx + +``` +location ~* ^/api/.*stream|\/graphql\/stream { +proxy_pass http://twenty_backend; +proxy_http_version 1.1; +proxy_set_header Connection ""; +proxy_set_header Host $host; +proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-For $proxy_add_x_forwarded_for; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme; +proxy_buffering off; +proxy_request_buffering off; +proxy_cache off; +gzip off; +#chunked_transfer_encoding off; +add_header X-Accel-Buffering no always; +} +``` + ### 1-clic con Docker Compose #### No se puede iniciar sesión diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/navigation.json b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/navigation.json index 3c33ea8314..00d647c523 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/navigation.json +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/navigation.json @@ -145,6 +145,14 @@ "label": "Guías prácticas" } } + }, + "legal": { + "label": "Legal", + "groups": { + "legalHowTos": { + "label": "Guías prácticas" + } + } } } }, diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx index 8dce2c2f61..45d1f10f50 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Esto está en nuestra hoja de ruta. * Muchas Personas están vinculadas a muchos Proyectos -Las relaciones de muchos a muchos están previstas para el 1.º semestre de 2026. +Se planifican relaciones muchas a muchas muchas para H2 2026. ## Vincular registros durante la importación diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx index 4727ebb456..ac362a7a94 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Para agregar un campo personalizado a cualquier objeto, siga estos pasos: 1. Vaya a `Configuración` en la barra lateral izquierda. 2. Vaya a `Modelo de Datos`, luego seleccione el objeto que desea personalizar. -3. Proceda haciendo clic en `Agregar Campo`. +3. Proceda haciendo clic en `+ New Field`. 4. Elija un nombre de campo y tipo que se adapten a sus requisitos. Considere agregar una descripción de campo para una mejor comprensión. Su nuevo campo creado ahora está disponible dentro de los campos de la aplicación. Para mostrarlo en una vista específica, haga clic en el menú de opciones, luego seleccione `Campos`. @@ -78,9 +78,7 @@ Puede desactivar un campo para ocultarlo de la aplicación sin perder sus datos. Así es como puede hacerlo: 1. Encuentre el campo que desea desactivar en la configuración de su objeto. - 2. Haga clic en los tres puntos `⋮` junto al campo para abrir el menú. - 3. Seleccione `Desactivar` en el menú desplegable. @@ -88,9 +86,7 @@ Así es como puede hacerlo: ¿Qué ocurre cuando desactiva un campo? 1. **En la aplicación:** El campo desaparece y no puede añadir nuevos valores. - 2. **Relaciones existentes:** Si es un campo de relación, las conexiones existentes permanecen, pero no puede crear nuevas. - 3. **Acceso API:** Aún puede acceder al campo y sus datos a través de la API. Puede reactivar los Campos Estándar y Personalizados o tener la opción de eliminarlos permanentemente. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx index 8a44d08cee..45f196273f 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Objetos estándar son entidades predefinidas en tu espacio de trabajo para ayuda El objeto `Personas` almacena tus contactos. Incluye detalles de contacto y el historial de interacciones, para que puedas ver todas tus interacciones con clientes en un solo lugar. -### Empresa +### Empresas El objeto `Empresas` almacena las cuentas de tu negocio. Incluye detalles como industria, tamaño y ubicación. Las empresas se conectan tanto a los objetos `Personas` como `Oportunidades`. @@ -47,7 +47,6 @@ Para crear un nuevo objeto personalizado: 3. Haz clic en `+ Nuevo objeto` en la parte superior. Ingresa el nombre (tanto singular como plural), elige un ícono y añade una descripción para tu objeto personalizado y presiona Guardar (en la parte superior derecha). Usando Listado como un ejemplo de objeto personalizado, el singular sería "listado" y el plural sería "listados" junto con una descripción como "Listados que los anfitriones crearon para mostrar sus propiedades." - 4. Su objeto personalizado ya se creó y aparecerá en su barra lateral. Puede empezar a añadir registros de inmediato. ## Gestión de objetos @@ -57,18 +56,20 @@ Para crear un nuevo objeto personalizado: Si no necesita un objeto estándar o personalizado: 1. Vaya a Configuración → Modelo de datos -2. Busque el objeto que desea desactivar -3. Haga clic en el interruptor para desactivarlo -4. El objeto se ocultará de su espacio de trabajo, pero los datos se conservarán +2. Encuentra el objeto que quieres desactivar y haz clic en él +3. Ir a la pestaña **Configuración** del objeto +4. Haz clic en el botón 'Desactivar' +5. El objeto se ocultará de su espacio de trabajo, pero los datos se conservarán ### Reactivación de objetos Para recuperar un objeto desactivado: 1. Vaya a Configuración → Modelo de datos -2. Busque los objetos desactivados (aparecerán en gris) -3. Haga clic en el interruptor para reactivarlo -4. El objeto y todos sus datos se restaurarán +2. Habilitar filtro 'Desactivado' +3. Busca objetos desactivados (tienen 'desactivados' junto a su nombre) +4. Haz clic en 'Deshacer' y luego en 'Activar' para reactivarlo +5. El objeto y todos sus datos se restaurarán ## Mejores prácticas diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx index dbfc0d8838..91adb78407 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Las relaciones de muchos a muchos usan un patrón de **objeto de unión**: un ob -**Función de laboratorio**: Las relaciones de unión deben habilitarse en **Settings → Updates → Lab** antes de usarlas. +**Características del laboratorio**: Las relaciones de unión deben estar habilitadas en **Ajustes → Comunidad → Características** antes de usar. Consulta [Cómo crear relaciones de muchos a muchos](/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations) para obtener una guía completa paso a paso. @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Consulta [Cómo crear relaciones de muchos a muchos](/l/es/user-guide/data-model 1. Vaya a **Configuración → Modelo de datos** 2. Seleccione el objeto en el que desea agregar la relación -3. Haga clic en **+ Add Field** +3. Haga clic **+ Nuevo campo** 4. Seleccione **Relation** como tipo de campo 5. Elija el(los) objeto(s) de destino con los que relacionar 6. Configure los ajustes de la relación: diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx index 83bf647099..a04eba6426 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Los campos personalizados le permiten capturar información específica de su ne 1. Vaya a **Configuración → Modelo de datos** 2. Seleccione el objeto al que desea agregar un campo -3. Haga clic en **+ Add Field** +3. Haga clic en **+ Nuevo campo** 4. Elija un **tipo de campo** (consulte [Campos](/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields) para ver todos los tipos) 5. Introduzca el **nombre del campo** y una descripción opcional 6. Configure los ajustes específicos del campo (consulte más abajo) diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx index 34af2d372c..ce04669f53 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Los objetos personalizados le permiten almacenar información exclusiva de su em ## Pasos 1. Vaya a **Configuración → Modelo de datos** -2. Haga clic en **+ New object** +2. Haga clic en **+ Añadir objeto** 3. Complete: * **Nombre en singular** (p. ej., "Listing") * **Nombre en plural** (p. ej., "Listings") @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Su objeto aparece de inmediato en la barra lateral. Los objetos nuevos comienzan con campos básicos. Agregue campos personalizados para capturar los datos que necesita: 1. En **Configuración → Modelo de datos**, seleccione su objeto -2. Haga clic en **+ Add Field** +2. Haga clic en **+ Nuevo campo** 3. Elija un tipo de campo, configúrelo y guarde Consulte [Cómo crear campos personalizados](/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields) para obtener detalles sobre los tipos de campos y su configuración. @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ Para vincular su objeto con Personas, Empresas u otros objetos, cree un campo de Si ya no necesita un objeto: -1. Vaya a **Configuración → Modelo de datos** -2. Desactive el objeto +1. Ve a **Ajustes → Modelo de datos → objeto de elección → Configuración** +2. Haga clic en el botón **Desactivar** El objeto se oculta, pero los datos se conservan. Puede reactivarlo o eliminarlo de forma permanente más tarde. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx index 959d0fbb0b..918f42b3a0 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Cuando activas el interruptor de relación de unión, Twenty muestra los registr Primero, crea el objeto intermedio que contendrá las conexiones. 1. Vaya a **Configuración → Modelo de datos** -2. Haga clic en **+ New object** +2. Haga clic en **+ Añadir objeto** 3. Asígnale un nombre descriptivo (p. ej., "Project Assignment", "Team Member", "Product Order") 4. Activa "Omitir la creación de un campo Nombre" diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx index 31a8cfee1a..82370c821f 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Consulta [Campos de Relación](/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation 1. Ve a **Configuración → Modelo de datos** 2. Selecciona el objeto donde quieres la relación (normalmente el lado "muchos") -3. Haz clic en **+ Añadir Campo** +3. Haga clic en **+ Nuevo campo** 4. Selecciona **Relación** como tipo de campo 5. Elige el **objeto de destino** 6. Selecciona **Uno a muchos** o **Muchos a uno** @@ -42,16 +42,26 @@ Consulta [Campos de Relación](/l/es/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation Ahora cada persona puede vincularse a una empresa, y cada empresa muestra a sus personas. -## Eliminar una relación +## Desactivando una relación -1. Ve a **Configuración → Modelo de datos** -2. Busca el campo de relación -3. Haz clic en **⋮ → Desactivar** +1. Ve a **Ajustes → Modelo de datos → objeto de elección** +2. Encuentre el campo de relación y haga clic en él +3. Haga clic en el botón **desactivar** Los enlaces se conservan, pero están ocultos. Vuelve a activar para restaurar. -**Eliminar una relación no elimina registros.** Solo se quita el enlace entre ellos. +**Desactivar una relación no elimina registros.** Sólo se elimina el enlace entre ellos. + + +## Eliminar una relación + +1. Ve a **Ajustes → Modelo de datos → objeto de elección** +2. Encuentre el campo de relación y haga clic en él +3. Haga clic en el botón **Eliminar** + + +Sólo se aplica a las relaciones personalizadas, las relaciones estándar sólo pueden desactivarse. ## Relacionado diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx index 7cdef878c0..5d555d128b 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx @@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ Todos los objetos activos aparecen en la navegación. Puedes desactivar los obje No, los tipos de campo no se pueden cambiar después de su creación. Si necesitas un tipo diferente, crea un campo nuevo con el tipo correcto, migra tus datos y luego desactiva el campo anterior. - Nuestra API de GraphQL usa ambas formas para diferentes operaciones: * `createPerson` (singular) para acciones de registro único @@ -73,15 +72,15 @@ Actualmente, no puedes hacer que los campos personalizados sean obligatorios. To -Los campos de fórmula llegarán en **Q1 2026**. Mientras tanto, puedes usar flujos de trabajo para calcular y actualizar automáticamente los valores de los campos. +Los campos de Fórmula están llegando en el **H2 2026**. Mientras tanto, puedes usar flujos de trabajo para calcular y actualizar automáticamente los valores de los campos. -Los campos anidados llegarán en **Q1 2026**. Actualmente, puedes usar flujos de trabajo para traer valores de campo de objetos relacionados. Por ejemplo, para mostrar la industria de una empresa en un registro de Persona, crea un campo personalizado en Personas y usa un flujo de trabajo para sincronizar el valor. +Los campos anidados vienen en **H2 2026**. Actualmente, puedes usar flujos de trabajo para traer valores de campo de objetos relacionados. Por ejemplo, para mostrar la industria de una empresa en un registro de Persona, crea un campo personalizado en Personas y usa un flujo de trabajo para sincronizar el valor. -El reordenamiento de campos estará disponible con diseños personalizados en **Q4 2025**. Actualmente, los campos aparecen en orden alfabético. +Sí, vaya a Ajustes → Modelo de datos → objeto de su elección → Diseño y haga clic en **Personalizar página de registro**. Si este botón está desactivado, debe crear un registro. @@ -93,7 +92,7 @@ El reordenamiento de campos estará disponible con diseños personalizados en ** -Las relaciones de muchos a muchos llegarán en **H1 2026**. Actualmente, crea un objeto intermedio con dos relaciones de uno a muchos como solución alternativa. +Las relaciones de muchos-a-muchos están llegando en **H2 2026**. Actualmente, crea un objeto intermedio con dos relaciones de uno a muchos como solución alternativa. Por ejemplo, para vincular Personas y Proyectos (muchos a muchos), crea un objeto "Asignaciones de proyecto" con: * Una relación con Personas (muchas asignaciones → una persona) @@ -147,6 +146,10 @@ Sí, puedes importar datos CSV en cualquier objeto, incluidos los objetos person Actualmente, no hay una exportación integrada para la configuración del modelo de datos. Contacta con soporte si necesitas migrar tu modelo de datos entre espacios de trabajo. + + +El número máximo de campos que puede tener un único objeto es de 1600 campos según los límites de Postgres, incluyendo ambos campos existentes y eliminados. Tenga en cuenta que Veinte no arreglará su espacio de trabajo si se alcanza el límite de 1600 campos ya que entra dentro de nuestra política de Uso Justo. + ## ¿Necesitas más ayuda? diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx index 63f2a0e712..b485134ecb 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx @@ -27,10 +27,6 @@ Twenty admite SSO con: * Acceso de administrador a su proveedor de identidad * Acceso de administrador al espacio de trabajo de Twenty - -**Para usuarios de autoalojamiento que deseen configurar SSO**, comuníquese con contact@twenty.com - - ### Pasos de configuración #### 1. Acceda a la configuración de SSO @@ -125,5 +121,5 @@ Si encuentra problemas, póngase en contacto con soporte y proporcione: * Detalles de la configuración (sin datos sensibles) - ¿Necesitas configurar SSO para tu organización? [Encuentra un partner certificado de Twenty](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso) especializado en la configuración de SSO e identidad. *(¿Prefieres involucrar directamente a Twenty? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com).)* +¿Necesitas configurar SSO para tu organización? [Encuentra un partner certificado de Twenty](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso) especializado en la configuración de SSO e identidad. *(¿Prefieres involucrar directamente a Twenty? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com))* diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx index f38630a2d4..cf609b62c7 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx @@ -7,15 +7,14 @@ La configuración de dominios se encuentra en tres lugares, según lo que estés ## Dominio del espacio de trabajo -Configura en **Ajustes → General → Dominio del espacio de trabajo**. +Configure bajo **Ajustes → General**. Edita el nombre de tu subdominio o establece un dominio personalizado para tu espacio de trabajo. ### Personalizar dominio -1. Haz clic en **Personalizar dominio** -2. Edita tu subdominio (p. ej., `yourcompany.twenty.com`) -3. O configura un dominio personalizado (p. ej., `crm.yourcompany.com`) +1. Haz clic en **Subdominio** para editar tu subdominio (por ejemplo, `tuempresa.twenty.com`) +2. O haga clic en **dominio personalizado** para configurar un dominio personalizado (por ejemplo, `crm.yourcompany.com`) Para dominios personalizados, tendrás que configurar los ajustes de DNS con tu proveedor de dominio. @@ -45,7 +44,7 @@ Las apps que exponen rutas en la web se sirven desde una URL dedicada, que se mu ### Agregar dominio personalizado -1. Haz clic en **Agregar Dominio Personalizado** +1. Haga clic en **dominio personalizado** 2. Introduce el dominio que quieres usar (p. ej., `app.yourcompany.com`) 3. Configura los ajustes de DNS según las instrucciones 4. Verifica el dominio diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx index 3bd128d2d9..7838ca2c89 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Gestiona quién tiene acceso a tu espacio de trabajo en **Ajustes → Miembros** ### Usando la Invitación por Correo Electrónico -1. Ir a **Ajustes → Miembros** +1. Ve a **Ajustes → Miembros → Invitar** 2. Haz clic en **+ Invitar** 3. Introduce la dirección de correo electrónico de la persona 4. Selecciona un rol para el nuevo miembro @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ La persona invitada recibirá un correo electrónico con un enlace para unirse a ### Usando el Enlace de Invitación -1. Ir a **Ajustes → Miembros** +1. Ve a **Ajustes → Miembros → Invitar** 2. Copiar el enlace de invitación a la área de trabajo 3. Compartir el enlace con nuevos miembros del equipo 4. Obtendrán acceso una vez que se registren @@ -28,10 +28,9 @@ La persona invitada recibirá un correo electrónico con un enlace para unirse a ### Ver todos los miembros -Ve a **Ajustes → Miembros** para ver: +Ve a **Ajustes → Miembros → Equipo** para ver a todos los miembros activos -* Todos los miembros activos -* Invitaciones pendientes +Ve a **Ajustes → Miembros → Invitar** para ver las invitaciones pendientes ### Editar el perfil de un miembro @@ -56,15 +55,15 @@ En la página de perfil del miembro: ### Eliminar un miembro 1. Haz clic en el miembro para abrir su perfil -2. Haz clic en **Eliminar** para eliminarlo del espacio de trabajo +2. Haga clic en **Eliminar cuenta** para eliminarlos del área de trabajo Los miembros eliminados pierden el acceso de inmediato. Sus datos (registros, notas, tareas) permanecen en el espacio de trabajo. - -**También se elimina la sincronización de correo electrónico.** Si el usuario eliminado era el único que sincronizaba ciertos correos electrónicos, esos correos se eliminarán permanentemente del espacio de trabajo. - + +Los correos electrónicos y eventos del calendario de usuarios eliminados están archivados y disponibles para otros usuarios. + ## Invitaciones pendientes diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx index 96a0694f65..de7e4e2ef2 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ description: Gestiona tu perfil personal y los ajustes de seguridad. Habilita 2FA para agregar una capa extra de seguridad a tu cuenta. -1. Ve a **Configuración → Configuración del perfil** -2. Haz clic en **Habilitar 2FA** +1. Ve a **Ajustes → Perfil** +2. Haz clic en **Aplicación de autenticación** 3. Escanea el código QR con tu aplicación de autenticación 4. Introduce el código de verificación para confirmar @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Eliminar tu cuenta eliminará permanentemente tu acceso a todos los espacios de Para eliminar tu cuenta: -1. Ve a **Configuración → Configuración del perfil** +1. Ve a **Ajustes → Perfil** 2. Desplázate hasta **Zona de peligro** 3. Haz clic en **Eliminar cuenta** 4. Confirma escribiendo tu dirección de correo electrónico diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx index 2777f8d775..33b79b569a 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Puedes configurar dominios de acceso aprobados para que los miembros del equipo -Las funciones de acceso anticipado son capacidades que se están probando antes del lanzamiento general. Actualmente, solo los **paneles** están en acceso anticipado. Pueden cambiar según los comentarios de los usuarios. +Las funciones de acceso anticipado son capacidades que se están probando antes del lanzamiento general. En la actualidad, sólo las **relaciones de junción** y las **vistas del día del calendario y la semana** están en acceso anticipado. Pueden cambiar según los comentarios de los usuarios. @@ -162,9 +162,10 @@ Las funciones de acceso anticipado son funcionales, pero pueden cambiar según l -1. Vaya a **Configuración → Actualizaciones → Acceso anticipado** -2. Busca la función que deseas -3. Actívala -4. La función está disponible de inmediato +1. Ve a **Ajustes → Comunidad** +2. Desplácese hasta la sección **Características** +3. Busca la función que deseas +4. Actívala +5. La función está disponible de inmediato diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx index d820a0ee3b..8887991227 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ La vista de calendario muestra sus registros en un calendario según un campo de 1. Navegue hasta un objeto con campos de fecha 2. Haga clic en el menú desplegable de la vista → **+ Agregar vista** -3. Asigne un nombre a su vista y haga clic en **Crear** +3. Nombre de la vista y haga clic en **Crear** 4. Abra las **Opciones** a la derecha 5. Seleccione **Calendario** como el diseño 6. Elija el **campo de fecha** que se usará para ubicar los registros diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx index 40209b5ecf..1e62875521 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/es/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx @@ -26,4 +26,4 @@ Obtenga ayuda de nuestro equipo central con nuestros [Paquetes de incorporación ### Socios de Implementación -Trabaje con socios certificados para personalizaciones avanzadas. Contáctenos en contact@twenty.com para conectarse con nuestros [socios de implementación](https://twenty.com/partners). +Trabaje con socios certificados para personalizaciones avanzadas. Contáctanos en [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com) para conectarte con nuestros [implementation partners](https://twenty.com/partners). diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx index 2edc05530b..359adde3f8 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ export default definePageLayout({ ### Points clés -* `type` est généralement `'RECORD_PAGE'` pour personnaliser la vue détaillée d'un objet spécifique. +* `type` est l'un de `'RECORD_INDEX'`, `'RECORD_PAGE'`, `'DASHBOARD'` ou `'STANDALONE_PAGE'`. Utilisez `'RECORD_PAGE'` pour personnaliser la vue détaillée d'un objet spécifique. * `objectUniversalIdentifier` spécifie à quel objet cette mise en page s'applique. * Chaque `tab` définit une section de la page avec un `title`, une `position` et un `layoutMode` (`VERTICAL_LIST` pour les pages d'enregistrement, `GRID` pour les tableaux de bord). Un onglet contenant un seul widget l'affiche automatiquement en pleine largeur ; avec plusieurs widgets, ils sont empilés sous forme de cartes. * Chaque `widget` à l'intérieur d'un onglet peut afficher un [front component](/l/fr/developers/extend/apps/layout/front-components), une liste de relations ou d'autres types de widgets intégrés. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx index e965af6fdf..51205603d5 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx @@ -171,6 +171,28 @@ Exécutez `UPDATE core."user" SET "canAccessFullAdminPanel" = TRUE WHERE email = En production, les fonctions logiques sont désactivées par défaut. Définissez la variable d'environnement `LOGIC_FUNCTION_TYPE` sur `LOCAL` ou `LAMBDA` pour les activer. Cela peut être configuré via des variables d'environnement ou via les variables de base de données du panneau d'administration. Voir le [guide de configuration des fonctions logiques](/l/fr/developers/self-host/capabilities/setup#logic-functions-available-drivers) pour plus de détails. +#### Quand je tape un message dans le chat IA, il ne répond pas immédiatement et je dois actualiser la page pour voir la réponse + +Ajouter le bloc suivant à la configuration de nginx + +``` +location ~* ^/api/.*stream|\/graphql\/stream { +proxy_pass http://twenty_backend; +proxy_http_version 1.1; +proxy_set_header Connection ""; +proxy_set_header Host $host; +proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-For $proxy_add_x_forwarded_for; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme; +proxy_buffering off; +proxy_request_buffering off; +proxy_cache off; +gzip off; +#chunked_transfer_encoding off; +add_header X-Accel-Buffering no always; +} +``` + ### Docker compose en un clic #### Impossible de se connecter diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/navigation.json b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/navigation.json index 0962d36058..a03804202b 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/navigation.json +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/navigation.json @@ -145,6 +145,14 @@ "label": "Guides pratiques" } } + }, + "legal": { + "label": "Juridique", + "groups": { + "legalHowTos": { + "label": "Guides pratiques" + } + } } } }, diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx index 69b524aeff..01651a5fb9 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ C'est sur notre feuille de route. * De nombreuses Personnes sont liées à de nombreux Projets -Les relations plusieurs à plusieurs sont prévues pour S1 2026. +Beaucoup à de nombreuses relations sont prévues pour H2 2026. ## Lier des enregistrements lors de l'importation diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx index f83bdf9d00..5734783fd8 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Pour ajouter un champ personnalisé à n'importe quel objet, suivez ces étapes: 1. Allez dans les `Paramètres` dans la barre latérale gauche. 2. Allez dans le `Modèle de Données`, puis sélectionnez l'objet que vous souhaitez personnaliser. -3. Continuez en cliquant sur `Ajouter un champ`. +3. Continuez en cliquant sur `+ New Field`. 4. Choisissez un nom de champ et un type qui répondent à vos exigences. Envisagez d'ajouter une description du champ pour une meilleure compréhension. Votre nouveau champ est maintenant disponible dans les champs de l'application. Pour l'afficher sur une vue spécifique, cliquez sur le menu des options, puis sélectionnez `Champs`. @@ -78,9 +78,7 @@ Vous pouvez désactiver un champ pour le masquer dans l'application sans perdre Voici comment vous pouvez le faire: 1. Trouvez le champ que vous voulez désactiver dans vos paramètres d'objet. - 2. Cliquez sur les trois points `⋮` à côté du champ pour ouvrir le menu. - 3. Sélectionnez `Désactiver` dans le menu déroulant. @@ -88,9 +86,7 @@ Voici comment vous pouvez le faire: Que se passe-t-il lorsque vous désactivez un champ? 1. **Dans l'application :** Le champ disparaît et vous ne pouvez plus ajouter de nouvelles valeurs. - -2. **Relations existantes :** S'il s'agit d'un champ de relation, les connexions existantes restent mais vous ne pouvez pas en créer de nouvelles. - +2. **Relations existantes :** S'il s'agit d'un champ de relation, les connexions existantes restent, mais vous ne pouvez pas en créer de nouvelles. 3. **Accès API :** Vous pouvez toujours accéder au champ et à ses données par l'API. Vous pouvez réactiver les champs standards et personnalisés ou avoir l'option de les supprimer définitivement. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx index 64f09fa368..31a01dfb41 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Les objets standard sont des entités prédéfinies dans votre espace de travail L'objet `Personnes` stocke vos contacts. Il inclut les détails de contact et l'historique des interactions, afin que vous puissiez voir toutes vos interactions client en un seul endroit. -### Entreprise +### Entreprises L'objet `Entreprises` stocke vos comptes professionnels. Il inclut des détails tels que l'industrie, la taille et la localisation. Les entreprises se connectent aux objets `Personnes` et `Opportunités`. @@ -47,7 +47,6 @@ Pour créer un nouvel objet personnalisé : 3. Cliquez sur `+ Nouvel objet` en haut. Entrez le nom (à la fois singulier et pluriel), choisissez une icône, ajoutez une description pour votre objet personnalisé et cliquez sur Enregistrer (en haut à droite). En utilisant Listing comme exemple d'objet personnalisé, le singulier serait "listing" et le pluriel serait "listings" avec une description comme "Les annonces que les hôtes ont créées pour présenter leur propriété." - 4. Votre objet personnalisé est maintenant créé et apparaîtra dans votre barre latérale. Vous pouvez commencer à y ajouter des enregistrements immédiatement. ## Gestion des objets @@ -57,18 +56,20 @@ Pour créer un nouvel objet personnalisé : Si vous n'avez pas besoin d'un objet standard ou personnalisé : 1. Allez dans Paramètres → Modèle de données -2. Recherchez l'objet que vous souhaitez désactiver -3. Cliquez sur l'interrupteur pour le désactiver -4. L'objet sera masqué dans votre espace de travail, mais ses données seront conservées +2. Trouvez l'objet que vous voulez désactiver et cliquez dessus +3. Allez à l'onglet **Paramètres** de l'objet +4. Cliquez sur le bouton `Désactiver` +5. L'objet sera masqué dans votre espace de travail, mais ses données seront conservées ### Réactivation des objets Pour réactiver un objet désactivé : 1. Allez dans Paramètres → Modèle de données -2. Recherchez les objets désactivés (ils seront grisés) -3. Cliquez sur l'interrupteur pour le réactiver -4. L'objet et toutes ses données seront restaurés +2. Activer le filtre `Désactivé` +3. Recherchez les objets désactivés (ils ont `désactivé` à côté de leur nom) +4. Cliquez sur `⋮`, puis sur `Activate` pour le réactiver +5. L'objet et toutes ses données seront restaurés ## Meilleures pratiques diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx index ff0dce43e2..c671ec72ae 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Les relations plusieurs-à-plusieurs utilisent un modèle d'**objet de jonction* -**Fonctionnalité de laboratoire**: Les relations de jonction doivent être activées dans **Settings → Updates → Lab** avant utilisation. +**Fonctionnalité de label**: Les relations de jonction doivent être activées dans **Paramètres → Communauté → Fonctionnalités** avant l'utilisation. Voir [Comment créer des relations plusieurs-à-plusieurs](/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations) pour un guide pas à pas complet. @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Voir [Comment créer des relations plusieurs-à-plusieurs](/l/fr/user-guide/data 1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Modèle de données** 2. Sélectionnez l'objet dans lequel vous souhaitez ajouter la relation -3. Cliquez sur **+ Ajouter un champ** +3. Cliquez sur **+ Nouveau champ** 4. Sélectionnez **Relation** comme type de champ 5. Choisissez l'objet cible ou les objets cibles à relier 6. Configurez les paramètres de la relation : diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx index bacac24348..3c0dc52fda 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Les champs personnalisés vous permettent de capturer des informations spécifiq 1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Modèle de données** 2. Sélectionnez l'objet auquel vous souhaitez ajouter un champ -3. Cliquez sur **+ Ajouter un champ** +3. Cliquez sur **+ Nouveau champ** 4. Choisissez un **type de champ** (voir [Champs](/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields) pour tous les types) 5. Saisissez le **nom du champ** et une description facultative 6. Configurez les paramètres spécifiques au champ (voir ci-dessous) diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx index 91d41f81cb..385bdb780f 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Les objets personnalisés vous permettent de stocker des informations propres à ## Étapes 1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Modèle de données** -2. Cliquez sur **+ Nouvel objet** +2. Cliquez sur **+ Ajouter un objet** 3. Renseignez : * **Nom au singulier** (p. ex. "Annonce") * **Nom au pluriel** (p. ex. "Annonces") @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Votre objet apparaît immédiatement dans la barre latérale. Les nouveaux objets commencent avec des champs de base. Ajoutez des champs personnalisés pour saisir les données dont vous avez besoin : 1. Dans **Paramètres → Modèle de données**, sélectionnez votre objet -2. Cliquez sur **+ Ajouter un champ** +2. Cliquez sur **+ Nouveau champ** 3. Choisissez un type de champ, configurez et enregistrez Voir [Comment créer des champs personnalisés](/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields) pour des détails sur les types de champs et la configuration. @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ Pour lier votre objet à des Personnes, des Entreprises ou à d'autres objets, c Si vous n'avez plus besoin d'un objet : -1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Modèle de données** -2. Désactivez l'objet +1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Modèle de données → objet de choix → Paramètres** +2. Cliquez sur le bouton **Désactiver** L'objet est masqué, mais les données sont conservées. Vous pourrez le réactiver ou le supprimer définitivement plus tard. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx index e95900a9f8..85a1c7a695 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Lorsque vous activez la bascule de relation de jonction, Twenty affiche directem D'abord, créez l'objet intermédiaire qui contiendra les connexions. 1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Modèle de données** -2. Cliquez sur **+ Nouvel objet** +2. Cliquez sur **+ Ajouter un objet** 3. Donnez-lui un nom explicite (p. ex., "Affectation de projet", "Membre de l'équipe", "Commande de produit") 4. Activez l’option "Ignorer la création d’un champ Nom" diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx index db63cb126e..88628da28d 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Voir [Champs de relation](/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fiel 1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Modèle de données** 2. Sélectionnez l'objet où vous voulez la relation (généralement le côté "plusieurs") -3. Cliquez sur **+ Ajouter un champ** +3. Cliquez sur **+ Nouveau champ** 4. Sélectionnez **Relation** comme type de champ 5. Choisissez l'**objet cible** 6. Sélectionnez **Un-à-plusieurs** ou **Plusieurs-à-un** @@ -42,16 +42,26 @@ Voir [Champs de relation](/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fiel Désormais, chaque Personne peut être liée à une Entreprise, et chaque Entreprise affiche ses Personnes. -## Suppression d'une relation +## Désactivation d'une relation -1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Modèle de données** -2. Recherchez le champ de relation -3. Cliquez sur **⋮ → Désactiver** +1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Modèle de données → objet de choix** +2. Trouvez le champ de relation et cliquez dessus +3. Cliquez sur le bouton **Désactiver** Les liens sont conservés mais masqués. Réactivez pour restaurer. -**La suppression d'une relation ne supprime pas les enregistrements.** Seul le lien entre eux est supprimé. +**La désactivation d'une relation ne supprime pas les enregistrements.** Seul le lien entre eux est supprimé. + + +## Suppression d'une relation + +1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Modèle de données → objet de choix** +2. Trouvez le champ de relation et cliquez dessus +3. Cliquez sur le bouton **Supprimer** + + +Ne s'applique qu'aux relations personnalisées, les relations standards ne peuvent être désactivées. ## Connexes diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx index cc213d5940..0ccbe0f715 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx @@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ Tous les objets actifs apparaissent dans la navigation. Vous pouvez désactiver Non, les types de champ ne peuvent pas être modifiés après leur création. Si vous avez besoin d'un type différent, créez un nouveau champ avec le type correct, migrez vos données, puis désactivez l'ancien champ. - Notre API GraphQL utilise les deux formes pour différentes opérations: * `createPerson` (singulier) pour des actions sur un seul enregistrement @@ -73,15 +72,15 @@ Actuellement, vous ne pouvez pas rendre les champs personnalisés obligatoires. -Les champs de formule arrivent en **T1 2026**. En attendant, vous pouvez utiliser les workflows pour calculer et mettre à jour automatiquement les valeurs des champs. +Les champs de formule arrivent dans **H2 2026**. En attendant, vous pouvez utiliser les workflows pour calculer et mettre à jour automatiquement les valeurs des champs. -Les champs imbriqués arrivent en **T1 2026**. Actuellement, vous pouvez utiliser des workflows pour extraire des valeurs de champs à partir d'objets connexes. Par exemple, pour afficher le secteur d'une entreprise sur une fiche Personne, créez un champ personnalisé sur Personnes et utilisez un workflow pour synchroniser la valeur. +Les champs imbriqués arrivent dans **H2 2026**. Actuellement, vous pouvez utiliser des workflows pour extraire des valeurs de champs à partir d'objets connexes. Par exemple, pour afficher le secteur d'une entreprise sur une fiche Personne, créez un champ personnalisé sur Personnes et utilisez un workflow pour synchroniser la valeur. -Le réagencement des champs sera disponible avec les mises en page personnalisées en **T4 2025**. Actuellement, les champs apparaissent par ordre alphabétique. +Oui, allez dans Paramètres → Modèle de données → objet de votre choix → Mise en page et cliquez sur **Personnaliser la page d'enregistrement**. Si ce bouton est désactivé, vous devez créer un enregistrement. @@ -93,7 +92,7 @@ Oui! Les relations auto-référencées sont prises en charge et recommandées po -Les relations plusieurs-à-plusieurs arrivent en **S1 2026**. Actuellement, créez un objet intermédiaire avec deux relations un-à-plusieurs comme solution de contournement. +De nombreuses relations arrivent dans **H2 2026**. Actuellement, créez un objet intermédiaire avec deux relations un-à-plusieurs comme solution de contournement. Par exemple, pour lier Personnes et Projets (plusieurs-à-plusieurs), créez un objet "Affectations de projet" avec : * Une relation vers Personnes (plusieurs affectations → une personne) @@ -147,6 +146,10 @@ Oui, vous pouvez importer des données CSV dans n'importe quel objet, y compris Actuellement, il n'existe pas d'export intégré pour la configuration du modèle de données. Contactez le support si vous devez migrer votre modèle de données entre des espaces de travail. + + +Le nombre maximum de champs qu'un seul objet peut avoir est de 1600 champs selon les limites Postgres, y compris les champs existants et supprimés. Sachez que 20 ne corrigeront pas votre espace de travail si la limite de 1 600 champs est atteinte car elle relève de notre politique d'utilisation équitable. + ## Besoin de plus d'aide ? diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx index 93a9179905..ade50f0d5b 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx @@ -27,10 +27,6 @@ Twenty prend en charge le SSO avec : * Accès administrateur à votre fournisseur d'identité * Accès administrateur à l'espace de travail Twenty - -**Pour les utilisateurs en auto-hébergement souhaitant configurer le SSO**, contactez contact@twenty.com - - ### Étapes de configuration #### 1. Accédez aux paramètres du SSO @@ -125,5 +121,5 @@ Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, contactez le support avec : * Détails de configuration (sans données sensibles) - Vous avez besoin de configurer le SSO pour votre organisation ? [Trouvez un partenaire Twenty certifié](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso) spécialisé en SSO et en gestion des identités. *(Vous préférez impliquer directement Twenty ? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com).)* +Vous avez besoin de configurer le SSO pour votre organisation ? [Trouvez un partenaire Twenty certifié](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso) spécialisé en SSO et en gestion des identités. *(Vous préférez impliquer directement Twenty ? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com))* diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx index 817aa9fe2f..1bb3aa8aaa 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx @@ -7,15 +7,14 @@ Les paramètres de domaine se trouvent à trois endroits, en fonction de ce que ## Domaine de l'espace de travail -Configurez dans **Paramètres → Général → Domaine de l’espace de travail**. +Configurer sous **Paramètres → Général**. Modifiez le nom de votre sous-domaine ou définissez un domaine personnalisé pour votre espace de travail. ### Personnaliser le domaine -1. Cliquez sur **Personnaliser le domaine** -2. Modifiez votre sous-domaine (par exemple, `yourcompany.twenty.com`) -3. Ou configurez un domaine personnalisé (par exemple, `crm.yourcompany.com`) +1. Cliquez sur **Sous-domaine** pour modifier votre sous-domaine (par exemple, `yourcompany.twenty.com`) +2. Ou cliquez sur **Domaine personnalisé** pour configurer un domaine personnalisé (par exemple, `crm.yourcompany.com`) Pour les domaines personnalisés, vous devrez configurer les paramètres DNS auprès de votre fournisseur de domaine. @@ -45,7 +44,7 @@ Les applications qui exposent des routes sur le Web sont accessibles via une URL ### Ajouter un domaine personnalisé -1. Cliquez sur **Ajouter un domaine personnalisé** +1. Cliquez sur **Domaine personnalisé** 2. Saisissez le domaine que vous souhaitez utiliser (par exemple, `app.yourcompany.com`) 3. Configurez les paramètres DNS comme indiqué 4. Vérifiez le domaine diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx index 87d0a2ec50..b817f68e73 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Gérez qui a accès à votre espace de travail dans **Paramètres → Membres**. ### Utilisation de l'invitation par e-mail -1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Membres** +1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Membres → Invitations** 2. Cliquez sur **+ Inviter** 3. Entrez l'adresse e-mail de la personne 4. Sélectionnez un rôle pour le nouveau membre @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ La personne invitée recevra un e-mail contenant un lien pour rejoindre votre es ### Utilisation du lien d'invitation -1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Membres** +1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Membres → Invitations** 2. Copiez le lien d'invitation de l'espace de travail 3. Partagez le lien avec les nouveaux membres de l'équipe 4. Ils auront accès dès leur inscription @@ -28,10 +28,9 @@ La personne invitée recevra un e-mail contenant un lien pour rejoindre votre es ### Afficher tous les membres -Allez dans **Paramètres → Membres** pour voir : +Allez dans **Paramètres → Membres → Équipe** pour voir tous les membres actifs -* Tous les membres actifs -* Invitations en attente +Allez dans **Paramètres → Membres → Invitation** pour voir les invitations en attente ### Modifier le profil d'un membre @@ -56,15 +55,15 @@ Sur la page de profil du membre : ### Retirer un membre 1. Cliquez sur le membre pour ouvrir son profil -2. Cliquez sur **Supprimer** pour le retirer de l'espace de travail +2. Cliquez sur **Supprimer le compte** pour les supprimer de l'espace de travail Les membres retirés perdent immédiatement l'accès. Leurs données (enregistrements, notes, tâches) restent dans l'espace de travail. - -**La synchronisation des e-mails est également supprimée.** Si l'utilisateur supprimé était le seul à avoir synchronisé certains e-mails, ces e-mails seront définitivement supprimés de l'espace de travail. - + +Les e-mails et les événements de calendrier des utilisateurs supprimés sont archivés et disponibles pour les autres utilisateurs. + ## Invitations en attente diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx index 9971dc5935..f7ef68ded8 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ description: Gérez votre profil personnel et vos paramètres de sécurité. Activez le 2FA pour ajouter une couche supplémentaire de sécurité à votre compte : -1. Accédez à **Paramètres → Paramètres du profil** -2. Cliquez sur **Activer le 2FA** +1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Profil** +2. Cliquez sur **Application d'authentification** 3. Scannez le code QR avec votre application d'authentification 4. Entrez le code de vérification pour confirmer @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ La suppression de votre compte supprimera définitivement votre accès à tous l Pour supprimer votre compte : -1. Accédez à **Paramètres → Paramètres du profil** +1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Profil** 2. Faites défiler jusqu'à **Zone de danger** 3. Cliquez sur **Supprimer le compte** 4. Confirmez en tapant votre adresse e-mail diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx index 4e9cbcb8fa..f41f9244f4 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Vous pouvez configurer des domaines d'accès approuvés afin que les membres de -Les fonctionnalités en Accès anticipé sont des fonctionnalités testées avant leur disponibilité générale. Actuellement, seuls les **Tableaux de bord** sont en Accès anticipé. Elles peuvent évoluer en fonction des retours des utilisateurs. +Les fonctionnalités en Accès anticipé sont des fonctionnalités testées avant leur disponibilité générale. Actuellement, seules les **relations de jumelage** et les **vues du jour et de la semaine du calendrier** sont en accès anticipé. Elles peuvent évoluer en fonction des retours des utilisateurs. @@ -162,9 +162,10 @@ Les fonctionnalités en Accès anticipé sont fonctionnelles mais peuvent évolu -1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Mises à jour → Accès anticipé** -2. Repérez la fonctionnalité souhaitée -3. Activez-la -4. La fonctionnalité devient disponible immédiatement +1. Allez dans **Paramètres → Communauté** +2. Faites défiler vers le bas jusqu'à la section **Fonctionnalités** +3. Repérez la fonctionnalité souhaitée +4. Activez-la +5. La fonctionnalité devient disponible immédiatement diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx index 0446df1922..307f9c9cba 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ La vue Calendrier affiche vos enregistrements sur un calendrier en fonction d'un 1. Accédez à un objet comportant des champs de date 2. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant de la vue → **+ Ajouter une vue** -3. Nommez votre vue et cliquez sur **Créer** +3. Nommez votre vue et cliquez sur **Créer** 4. Ouvrez les **Options** à droite 5. Sélectionnez **Calendrier** comme mise en page 6. Choisissez le **champ de date** à utiliser pour positionner les enregistrements diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx index 8316448036..2d112d470f 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/fr/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx @@ -26,4 +26,4 @@ Obtenez de l'aide de notre équipe centrale avec nos packs [d'intégration de 4 ### Partenaires pour l'Implémentation -Collaborez avec des partenaires certifiés pour des personnalisations avancées. Contactez-nous à l'adresse contact@twenty.com pour vous mettre en relation avec nos [partenaires d'intégration](https://twenty.com/partners). +Collaborez avec des partenaires certifiés pour des personnalisations avancées. Contactez-nous à [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com) pour entrer en contact avec nos [partenaires de mise en œuvre](https://twenty.com/partners). diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx index 0d39086eee..a1042cf5ee 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ export default definePageLayout({ ### Punti chiave -* `type` è in genere `'RECORD_PAGE'` per personalizzare la vista dei dettagli di un oggetto specifico. +* `type` è uno tra `'RECORD_INDEX'`, `'RECORD_PAGE'`, `'DASHBOARD'` o `'STANDALONE_PAGE'`. Usa `'RECORD_PAGE'` per personalizzare la vista dei dettagli di un oggetto specifico. * `objectUniversalIdentifier` specifica a quale oggetto si applica questo layout. * Ogni `tab` definisce una sezione della pagina con `title`, `position` e `layoutMode` (`VERTICAL_LIST` per le pagine dei record, `GRID` per le dashboard). Una scheda che contiene un singolo widget lo visualizza automaticamente a tutta larghezza; con più widget, vengono impilati come card. * Ogni `widget` all'interno di una scheda può renderizzare un [front component](/l/it/developers/extend/apps/layout/front-components), un elenco di relazioni o altri tipi di widget integrati. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx index da2f8671d2..0c71070888 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx @@ -172,6 +172,28 @@ Esegui `UPDATE core."user" SET "canAccessFullAdminPanel" = TRUE WHERE email = 'y In produzione, le funzioni logiche sono disabilitate per impostazione predefinita. Imposta la variabile d'ambiente `LOGIC_FUNCTION_TYPE` su `LOCAL` o `LAMBDA` per abilitarle. Questo può essere configurato tramite variabili d'ambiente o tramite le variabili del database del pannello di amministrazione. Consulta la [guida alla configurazione delle funzioni logiche](/l/it/developers/self-host/capabilities/setup#logic-functions-available-drivers) per dettagli. +#### Quando digito un messaggio in chat AI, non risponde immediatamente e devo aggiornare la pagina per vedere la risposta + +Aggiungi il seguente blocco alla configurazione di nginx + +``` +location ~* ^/api/.*stream|\/graphql\/stream { +proxy_pass http://twenty_backend; +proxy_http_version 1.1; +proxy_set_header Connection ""; +proxy_set_header Host $host; +proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-For $proxy_add_x_forwarded_for; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme; +proxy_buffering off; +proxy_request_buffering off; +proxy_cache off; +gzip off; +#chunked_transfer_encoding off; +add_header X-Accel-Buffering no always; +} +``` + ### Composizione Docker a un clic #### Impossibile connettersi diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/navigation.json b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/navigation.json index 72f8891f1d..5682b4e940 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/navigation.json +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/navigation.json @@ -145,6 +145,14 @@ "label": "Guide pratiche" } } + }, + "legal": { + "label": "Legale", + "groups": { + "legalHowTos": { + "label": "Guide pratiche" + } + } } } }, diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx index 5118ff378e..1f87316928 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Qui, il Progetto è sul lato "uno". Più record di oggetti diversi possono colle * Molte Persone sono collegate a molti Progetti -Le relazioni molti a molti sono previste per H1 2026. +Molti a molte relazioni sono previsti per H2 2026. ## Collegare i record durante l'importazione diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx index 05a78fda2b..a4cd046c5d 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Per aggiungere un campo personalizzato a qualsiasi oggetto, segui questi passagg 1. Vai su `Impostazioni` nella barra laterale sinistra. 2. Vai su `Modello di dati`, quindi seleziona l'oggetto che desideri personalizzare. -3. Procedi cliccando su `Aggiungi Campo`. +3. Procedi cliccando su `+ New Field`. 4. Scegli un nome e un tipo di campo che si adattano alle tue esigenze. Considera l'aggiunta di una descrizione del campo per una migliore comprensione. Il tuo nuovo campo è ora disponibile nei campi dell'applicazione. Per visualizzarlo in una vista specifica, fai clic sul menu delle opzioni, quindi seleziona `Campi`. @@ -78,9 +78,7 @@ Puoi disattivare un campo per nasconderlo dall'app senza perdere i tuoi dati. Pe Ecco come puoi farlo: 1. Trova il campo che desideri disattivare nelle impostazioni del tuo oggetto. - 2. Clicca sui tre punti `⋮` accanto al campo per aprire il menu. - 3. Seleziona `Disattiva` dall'elenco a discesa. @@ -88,9 +86,7 @@ Ecco come puoi farlo: Cosa succede quando disattivi un campo? 1. **Nell'app:** Il campo scompare e non puoi aggiungervi nuovi valori. - -2. **Relazioni esistenti:** Se è un campo di relazione, le connessioni esistenti rimangono ma non puoi crearne di nuove. - +2. **Relazioni esistenti:** Se è un campo di relazione, le connessioni esistenti rimangono, ma non puoi crearne di nuove. 3. **Accesso API:** Puoi ancora accedere al campo e ai suoi dati tramite l'API. Puoi riattivare i campi Standard e Personalizzati o avere l'opzione di eliminarli permanentemente. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx index e069388feb..4089c327bf 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Gli oggetti standard sono entità predefinite nel tuo spazio di lavoro per aiuta L'oggetto `Persone` memorizza i tuoi contatti. Include dettagli di contatto e cronologia delle interazioni, così puoi vedere tutte le tue interazioni con i clienti in un unico posto. -### Azienda +### Aziende L'oggetto `Aziende` memorizza i tuoi account aziendali. Include dettagli come settore, dimensioni e posizione. Le aziende si collegano sia agli oggetti `Persone` che `Opportunità`. @@ -47,7 +47,6 @@ Per creare un nuovo oggetto personalizzato: 3. Clicca su `+ Nuovo oggetto` in alto. Inserisci il nome (sia singolare che plurale), scegli un'icona, aggiungi una descrizione per il tuo oggetto personalizzato e clicca Salva (in alto a destra). Utilizzando Annuncio come esempio di oggetto personalizzato, il singolare sarebbe "annuncio" e il plurale sarebbe "annunci" insieme a una descrizione come "Annunci che gli host hanno creato per mostrare la loro proprietà." - 4. Il tuo oggetto personalizzato è stato creato e apparirà nella barra laterale. Puoi iniziare subito ad aggiungere record. ## Gestione degli oggetti @@ -57,18 +56,20 @@ Per creare un nuovo oggetto personalizzato: Se non hai bisogno di un oggetto standard o personalizzato: 1. Vai a Impostazioni → Modello dati -2. Trova l'oggetto che vuoi disattivare -3. Fai clic sull'interruttore per disattivarlo -4. L'oggetto sarà nascosto dal tuo spazio di lavoro, ma i dati verranno conservati +2. Trova l'oggetto che vuoi disattivare e fai clic su di esso +3. Vai alla scheda **Impostazioni** dell'oggetto +4. Clicca sul pulsante `Deactivate` +5. L'oggetto sarà nascosto dal tuo spazio di lavoro, ma i dati verranno conservati ### Riattivazione degli oggetti Per riattivare un oggetto disattivato: 1. Vai a Impostazioni → Modello dati -2. Cerca gli oggetti disattivati (saranno visualizzati in grigio) -3. Fai clic sull'interruttore per riattivarlo -4. L'oggetto e tutti i suoi dati verranno ripristinati +2. Abilita il filtro `Disattivato` +3. Cerca oggetti disattivati (hanno `Deactivated` accanto al loro nome) +4. Fai clic su `⋮` e quindi su `Activate` per riattivarlo +5. L'oggetto e tutti i suoi dati verranno ripristinati ## Migliori Pratiche diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx index 50311961ff..18f165d5ba 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Le relazioni molti-a-molti utilizzano lo schema dell'**oggetto di giunzione**: u -**Funzionalità di laboratorio**: le relazioni di giunzione devono essere abilitate in **Impostazioni → Aggiornamenti → Lab** prima dell'uso. +**Funzione di laboratorio**: le relazioni di giunzione devono essere abilitate a **Impostazioni → Community → Funzionalità** prima dell'uso. Vedi [Come creare molte relazioni](/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations) per una guida completa passo-passo. @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Vedi [Come creare molte relazioni](/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-ma 1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Modello dati** 2. Seleziona l'oggetto in cui vuoi aggiungere la relazione -3. Fai clic su **+ Aggiungi campo** +3. Clicca su **+ Nuovo campo** 4. Seleziona **Relazione** come tipo di campo 5. Scegli l'oggetto o gli oggetti di destinazione a cui collegare 6. Configura le impostazioni della relazione: diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx index 1a3e879179..1c02044fc4 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ I campi personalizzati ti consentono di acquisire informazioni specifiche per la 1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Modello dati** 2. Seleziona l'oggetto a cui vuoi aggiungere un campo -3. Fai clic su **+ Aggiungi campo** +3. Clicca Su **+ Nuovo Campo** 4. Scegli un **tipo di campo** (vedi [Campi](/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields) per tutti i tipi) 5. Inserisci il **nome del campo** e una descrizione facoltativa 6. Configura le impostazioni specifiche del campo (vedi sotto) diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx index 9c66725e17..6b23bc9dac 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Gli oggetti personalizzati ti permettono di memorizzare informazioni uniche per ## Passaggi 1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Modello dati** -2. Fai clic su **+ Nuovo oggetto** +2. Clicca su **+ Aggiungi oggetto** 3. Compila: * **Nome singolare** (ad es., "Inserzione") * **Nome plurale** (ad es., "Inserzioni") @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Il tuo oggetto appare immediatamente nella barra laterale. I nuovi oggetti iniziano con campi di base. Aggiungi campi personalizzati per acquisire i dati di cui hai bisogno: 1. In **Impostazioni → Modello dati**, seleziona il tuo oggetto -2. Fai clic su **+ Aggiungi campo** +2. Clicca Su **+ Nuovo Campo** 3. Scegli un tipo di campo, configura e salva Consulta [Come creare campi personalizzati](/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields) per i dettagli sui tipi di campo e sulla configurazione. @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ Per collegare il tuo oggetto a Persone, Aziende o altri oggetti, crea un campo d Se non hai più bisogno di un oggetto: -1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Modello dati** -2. Disattiva l'oggetto +1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Modello dati → oggetto scelto → Impostazioni** +2. Clicca sul pulsante **Disattiva** L'oggetto è nascosto ma i dati vengono conservati. Puoi riattivarlo o eliminarlo definitivamente in un secondo momento. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx index 620648fec4..53438a1429 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Quando abiliti l'interruttore della relazione di giunzione, Twenty mostra dirett Per prima cosa, crea l'oggetto intermedio che conterrà i collegamenti. 1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Modello dati** -2. Fai clic su **+ Nuovo oggetto** +2. Clicca su **+ Aggiungi oggetto** 3. Assegnagli un nome descrittivo (ad es., "Assegnazione al progetto", "Membro del team", "Ordine del prodotto") 4. Attiva l'opzione "Salta la creazione di un campo Nome" diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx index 0ebccd2e46..979aa8e23b 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Consulta [Campi di Relazione](/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation- 1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Modello dati** 2. Seleziona l'oggetto in cui vuoi la relazione (in genere il lato "molti") -3. Fai clic su **+ Aggiungi campo** +3. Fai clic su **+ Nuovo campo** 4. Seleziona **Relazione** come tipo di campo 5. Scegli l'**oggetto di destinazione** 6. Seleziona **Uno-a-molti** o **Molti-a-uno** @@ -42,16 +42,26 @@ Consulta [Campi di Relazione](/l/it/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation- Ora ogni Persona può essere collegata a un'Azienda e ogni Azienda mostra le proprie Persone. -## Eliminare una relazione +## Disattivare una relazione -1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Modello dati** -2. Trova il campo di relazione -3. Fai clic su **⋮ → Disattiva** +1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Modello dati → oggetto a scelta** +2. Trova il campo di relazione e fai clic su di esso +3. Fai clic sul pulsante **Disattiva** I collegamenti vengono conservati ma nascosti. Riattiva per ripristinare. -**Eliminare una relazione non elimina i record.** Viene rimosso solo il collegamento tra di essi. +**La disattivazione di una relazione non elimina i record.** Viene rimosso solo il collegamento tra di essi. + + +## Eliminare una relazione + +1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Modello dati → oggetto a scelta** +2. Trova il campo di relazione e fai clic su di esso +3. Fai clic sul pulsante **Elimina** + + +Si applica solo alle relazioni personalizzate, le relazioni standard possono solo essere disattivate. ## Correlati diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx index acda1e4e5e..5c46c2e03b 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx @@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ Tutti gli oggetti attivi appaiono nella navigazione. Puoi disattivare gli oggett No, i tipi di campo non possono essere cambiati dopo la creazione. Se ti serve un tipo diverso, crea un nuovo campo con il tipo corretto, migra i tuoi dati e poi disattiva il vecchio campo. - La nostra API GraphQL utilizza entrambe le forme per operazioni diverse: * `createPerson` (singolare) per azioni su singoli record @@ -73,15 +72,15 @@ Attualmente non puoi rendere obbligatori i campi personalizzati. Tutti i campi a -I campi di formula arriveranno nel **Q1 2026**. Nel frattempo, puoi utilizzare i Workflows per calcolare e aggiornare automaticamente i valori dei campi. +I campi di formula sono in arrivo in **H2 2026**. Nel frattempo, puoi utilizzare i Workflows per calcolare e aggiornare automaticamente i valori dei campi. -I campi nidificati arriveranno nel **Q1 2026**. Attualmente, puoi utilizzare i Workflows per importare i valori dei campi da oggetti correlati. Ad esempio, per visualizzare il settore di un'azienda sul record di una Persona, crea un campo personalizzato su Persone e utilizza un Workflow per sincronizzare il valore. +I campi annidati stanno arrivando in **H2 2026**. Attualmente, puoi utilizzare i Workflows per importare i valori dei campi da oggetti correlati. Ad esempio, per visualizzare il settore di un'azienda sul record di una Persona, crea un campo personalizzato su Persone e utilizza un Workflow per sincronizzare il valore. -Il riordino dei campi sarà disponibile con layout personalizzati nel **Q4 2025**. Attualmente, i campi sono visualizzati in ordine alfabetico. +Sì, vai a Impostazioni → Modello di dati → oggetto a tua scelta → Layout e clicca su **Personalizza la pagina di record**. Se questo pulsante è disabilitato, è necessario creare un record. @@ -93,7 +92,7 @@ Sì! Le relazioni auto-referenziali sono supportate e consigliate per casi d'uso -Le relazioni molti-a-molti arriveranno nell'H1 2026. Attualmente, crea un oggetto intermedio con due relazioni uno-a-molti come soluzione alternativa. +Molte relazioni tra molti sono in arrivo nel **H2 2026**. Attualmente, crea un oggetto intermedio con due relazioni uno-a-molti come soluzione alternativa. Ad esempio, per collegare Persone e Progetti (molti-a-molti), crea un oggetto "Assegnazioni ai progetti" con: * Una relazione con Persone (molte assegnazioni → una persona) @@ -147,6 +146,10 @@ Sì, puoi importare dati CSV in qualsiasi oggetto, inclusi gli oggetti personali Attualmente non esiste un'esportazione integrata per la configurazione del modello dati. Contatta il supporto se devi migrare il tuo modello dati tra spazi di lavoro. + + +Il numero massimo di campi che un singolo oggetto può avere è di 1600 campi secondo i limiti di Postgres, inclusi i campi esistenti e cancellati. Siate consapevoli che Venti non risolveranno il vostro spazio di lavoro se si raggiunge il limite di 1600 campi in quanto rientra nella nostra politica di utilizzo equo. + ## Hai bisogno di ulteriore aiuto? diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx index ace37278dd..f2f0fec132 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx @@ -27,10 +27,6 @@ Twenty supporta l'SSO con: * Accesso amministratore al tuo provider di identità * Accesso amministratore allo spazio di lavoro Twenty - -**Per gli utenti self-hosting che desiderano configurare l'SSO**, contatta contact@twenty.com - - ### Passaggi di configurazione #### 1. Accedi alle impostazioni dell'SSO @@ -125,5 +121,5 @@ Se riscontri problemi, contatta l'assistenza fornendo: * Dettagli di configurazione (senza dati sensibili) - Hai bisogno di configurare l’SSO per la tua organizzazione? [Trova un partner Twenty certificato](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso) specializzato in SSO e configurazione dell’identità. *(Preferisci coinvolgere direttamente Twenty? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com).)* +Hai bisogno di configurare l’SSO per la tua organizzazione? [Trova un partner Twenty certificato](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso) specializzato in SSO e configurazione dell’identità. *(Preferisci coinvolgere direttamente Twenty? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com))* diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx index fc6d1816ca..5ee97f54b6 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx @@ -7,15 +7,14 @@ Le impostazioni di dominio si trovano in tre posizioni, a seconda di ciò che st ## Dominio del workspace -Configura in **Impostazioni → Generali → Dominio dello spazio di lavoro**. +Configurare sotto **Impostazioni → Generale**. Modifica il nome del sottodominio o imposta un dominio personalizzato per il tuo spazio di lavoro. ### Personalizza dominio -1. Fai clic su **Personalizza dominio** -2. Modifica il tuo sottodominio (ad es., `yourcompany.twenty.com`) -3. Oppure configura un dominio personalizzato (ad es., `crm.yourcompany.com`) +1. Clicca su **Sottodominio** per modificare il sottodominio (ad es. `yourcompany.twenty.com`) +2. Oppure clicca su **Dominio personalizzato** per impostare un dominio personalizzato (ad esempio, `crm.yourcompany.com`) Per i domini personalizzati, dovrai configurare le impostazioni DNS con il tuo provider del dominio. @@ -45,7 +44,7 @@ Le app che espongono route sul web vengono servite da un URL dedicato, mostrato ### Aggiungi dominio personalizzato -1. Fai clic su **Aggiungi dominio personalizzato** +1. Clicca Su **Dominio Personalizzato** 2. Inserisci il dominio che vuoi usare (ad es., `app.yourcompany.com`) 3. Configura le impostazioni DNS come indicato 4. Verifica il dominio diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx index 17069f74b9..4bbff5f716 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Gestisci chi ha accesso al tuo spazio di lavoro in **Impostazioni → Membri**. ### Utilizzo dell'invito via email -1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Membri** +1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Membri → Invita** 2. Fai clic su **+ Invita** 3. Inserisci l'indirizzo email della persona 4. Seleziona un ruolo per il nuovo membro @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ La persona invitata riceverà un'email con un link per unirsi al tuo spazio di l ### Utilizzo del link di invito -1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Membri** +1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Membri → Invita** 2. Copia il link di invito allo spazio di lavoro 3. Condividi il link con i nuovi membri del team 4. Riceveranno accesso una volta registrati @@ -28,10 +28,9 @@ La persona invitata riceverà un'email con un link per unirsi al tuo spazio di l ### Visualizza tutti i membri -Vai a **Impostazioni → Membri** per vedere: +Vai a **Impostazioni → Membri → Team** per vedere tutti i membri attivi -* Tutti i membri attivi -* Inviti in sospeso +Vai a **Impostazioni → Membri → Invito** per vedere gli inviti in sospeso ### Modifica il profilo di un membro @@ -56,15 +55,15 @@ Nella pagina del profilo del membro: ### Rimuovi un membro 1. Fai clic sul membro per aprire il suo profilo -2. Fai clic su **Elimina** per rimuoverlo dallo spazio di lavoro +2. Clicca su **Elimina account** per rimuoverli dal workspace I membri rimossi perdono immediatamente l'accesso. I loro dati (record, note, attività) rimangono nello spazio di lavoro. - -**Anche la sincronizzazione email viene rimossa.** Se l'utente eliminato era l'unico ad aver sincronizzato determinate email, tali email verranno rimosse definitivamente dallo spazio di lavoro. - + +Le email e gli eventi di calendario dell'utente cancellato sono archiviati e disponibili per altri utenti. + ## Inviti in sospeso diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx index 3d0682ae8f..60a9c01d2a 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ description: Gestisci il tuo profilo personale e le impostazioni di sicurezza. Abilita 2FA per aggiungere un livello extra di sicurezza al tuo account: -1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Impostazioni del Profilo** -2. Clicca **Abilita 2FA** +1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Profilo** +2. Fai clic su **App di autenticazione** 3. Scansiona il codice QR con la tua app di autenticazione 4. Inserisci il codice di verifica per confermare @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Eliminare il tuo account rimuoverà permanentemente il tuo accesso a tutti i wor Per eliminare il tuo account: -1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Impostazioni del Profilo** +1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Profilo** 2. Scorri fino a **Zona di Pericolo** 3. Clicca **Elimina Account** 4. Conferma digitando il tuo indirizzo email diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx index 42315e001b..3e5118da87 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Puoi configurare domini di accesso approvati in modo che i membri del team con i -Le funzionalità di accesso anticipato sono funzionalità in fase di test prima della disponibilità generale. Attualmente, solo le **Dashboard** sono in accesso anticipato. Possono cambiare in base al feedback degli utenti. +Le funzionalità di accesso anticipato sono funzionalità in fase di test prima della disponibilità generale. Attualmente, solo le **relazioni di giunzione** e le **viste giornaliere e settimanali** sono in accesso anticipato. Possono cambiare in base al feedback degli utenti. @@ -162,9 +162,10 @@ Le funzionalità di accesso anticipato sono funzionanti ma possono cambiare in b -1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Aggiornamenti → Accesso anticipato** -2. Trova la funzionalità che ti interessa -3. Attivala -4. La funzionalità diventa disponibile immediatamente +1. Vai a **Impostazioni → Comunità** +2. Scorri verso il basso fino alla sezione **Caratteristiche** +3. Trova la funzionalità che ti interessa +4. Attivala +5. La funzionalità diventa disponibile immediatamente diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx index 930a46a680..0d945e2f2e 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ La Vista Calendario visualizza i tuoi record su un calendario in base a un campo 1. Vai a un oggetto con campi data 2. Clicca sul menu a discesa della vista → **+ Aggiungi vista** -3. Assegna un nome alla vista e clicca su **Crea** +3. Dai un nome alla tua vista e clicca su **Crea** 4. Apri le **Opzioni** sulla destra 5. Seleziona **Calendario** come layout 6. Scegli il **campo data** da usare per posizionare i record diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx index ba534e609a..e40fbf5c01 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/it/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx @@ -26,4 +26,4 @@ Ottieni aiuto dal nostro team principale con i nostri pacchetti di [Onboarding d ### Partner di Implementazione -Collabora con partner certificati per personalizzazioni avanzate. Contattaci a contact@twenty.com per connetterti con i nostri [partner di implementazione](https://twenty.com/partners). +Collabora con partner certificati per personalizzazioni avanzate. Contattaci all'indirizzo [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com) per entrare in contatto con i nostri [partner di implementazione](https://twenty.com/partners). diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx index 34e318b14a..3144f62aa8 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ export default definePageLayout({ ### 主なポイント -* `type` は通常、特定のオブジェクトの詳細ビューをカスタマイズするために `'RECORD_PAGE'` を指定します。 +* `type` は `'RECORD_INDEX'`、`'RECORD_PAGE'`、`'DASHBOARD'`、`'STANDALONE_PAGE'` のいずれかです。 特定のオブジェクトの詳細ビューをカスタマイズするには `'RECORD_PAGE'` を使用します。 * `objectUniversalIdentifier` は、このレイアウトを適用するオブジェクトを指定します。 * 各 `tab` は、`title`、`position`、`layoutMode`（レコードページには `VERTICAL_LIST`、ダッシュボードには `GRID`）を持つページのセクションを定義します。 1 つのウィジェットのみを含むタブでは、そのウィジェットが自動的にフルブリードで表示され、複数のウィジェットがある場合はカードとして積み重なります。 * タブ内の各 `widget` は、[front component](/l/ja/developers/extend/apps/layout/front-components)、リレーションリスト、その他のビルトインウィジェットタイプをレンダリングできます。 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx index 1b7b011732..df65d6b1fe 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx @@ -178,6 +178,28 @@ adminパネルにアクセスするには、データベースコンテナで`UP 本番環境では、ロジック関数はデフォルトで無効になっています。 有効にするには、`LOGIC_FUNCTION_TYPE` 環境変数を `LOCAL` または `LAMBDA` に設定します。 これは、環境変数経由、または管理画面のデータベース変数から設定できます。 詳細は[ロジック関数のセットアップガイド](/l/ja/developers/self-host/capabilities/setup#logic-functions-available-drivers)を参照してください。 +#### AIチャットでメッセージを入力すると、すぐには答えられず、答えを見るためにページを更新する必要があります。 + +nginx 設定に以下のブロックを追加 + +``` +location ~* ^/api/.*stream|\/graphql\/stream { +proxy_pass http://twenty_backend; +proxy_http_version 1.1; +proxy_set_header Connection ""; +proxy_set_header Host $host; +proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-For $proxy_add_x_forwarded_for; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme; +proxy_buffering off; +proxy_request_buffering off; +proxy_cache off; +gzip off; +#chunked_transfer_encoding off; +add_header X-Accel-Buffering no always; +} +``` + ### 1クリックでDocker構成 #### ログインできない diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/navigation.json b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/navigation.json index c2da8b2f7f..f0dc5e1c83 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/navigation.json +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/navigation.json @@ -145,6 +145,14 @@ "label": "ハウツー" } } + }, + "legal": { + "label": "法務", + "groups": { + "legalHowTos": { + "label": "ハウツー" + } + } } } }, diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx index cb9535b26e..d5a856f3c7 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Twenty は、1 件のレコードが複数のレコードにリンクする標 * 多数の連絡先が多数のプロジェクトにリンクされる -多対多リレーションは 2026 年上半期に提供予定です。 +H22026年には多くの関係が予定されています。 ## インポート時にレコードをリンクする diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx index 1387efb47b..4f8ceb1153 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx @@ -61,8 +61,7 @@ Twenty はさまざまなフィールドタイプをサポートしています 1. 左サイドバーの「設定」に移動します。 2. 「データモデル」に移動し、カスタマイズしたいオブジェクトを選択します。 3. -3. 「フィールドを追加」をクリックして続行します。 - 4. +3. 「+ New Field」をクリックして続行します。 4. 要件に合ったフィールド名とタイプを選択してください。 より良い理解のためにフィールドの説明を追加することを検討してください。 より良い理解のためにフィールドの説明を追加することを検討してください。 より良い理解のためにフィールドの説明を追加することを検討してください。 作成したフィールドはアプリケーションのフィールド内で利用できるようになります。 特定のビューに表示するには、オプションメニューをクリックして「フィールド」を選択します。 特定のビューに表示するには、オプションメニューをクリックして「フィールド」を選択します。 @@ -80,9 +79,7 @@ Twenty はさまざまなフィールドタイプをサポートしています 以下に方法を示します。 1. オブジェクト設定で無効化したいフィールドを見つけます。 - 2. フィールドの横にある三点リーダー`⋮`をクリックしてメニューを開きます。 - 3. ドロップダウンメニューから「無効化」を選択します。 @@ -90,9 +87,7 @@ Twenty はさまざまなフィールドタイプをサポートしています フィールドを無効にするとどうなりますか？ 1. **アプリ内では:** フィールドが消え、新しい値を追加することができなくなります。 - 2. **既存の関係:** それがリレーションフィールドである場合、既存の接続は維持されますが、新しいものを作成することはできません。 - 3. **APIアクセス:** フィールドとそのデータには引き続きAPI経由でアクセスできます。 標準フィールドとカスタムフィールドを再アクティブ化することができます。また、それらを永久に削除するオプションがあります。 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx index 8b08dfe3ad..44bb5e3aaf 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx @@ -47,7 +47,6 @@ import { VimeoEmbed } from '/snippets/vimeo-embed.mdx'; 3. 上部の `+ 新しいオブジェクト` をクリックします。 カスタムオブジェクトの名前（単数形と複数形の両方）、アイコンを選択し、説明を追加し、[保存]（右上）をクリックします。 上部の `+ 新しいオブジェクト` をクリックします。 カスタムオブジェクトの名前（単数形と複数形の両方）、アイコンを選択し、説明を追加し、[保存]（右上）をクリックします。 カスタムオブジェクトの例として、Listingを使用し、単数形は "listing" 、複数形は "listings" 、説明は "ホストがプロパティを紹介するために作成したリスティング" となります。 - 4. カスタムオブジェクトが作成され、サイドバーに表示されます。 すぐにレコードを追加できます。 ## オブジェクトの管理 @@ -57,18 +56,20 @@ import { VimeoEmbed } from '/snippets/vimeo-embed.mdx'; 標準オブジェクトまたはカスタムオブジェクトが不要な場合: 1. 設定 → データモデル に移動 -2. 無効化したいオブジェクトを見つけます -3. トグルをクリックして無効化します -4. オブジェクトはワークスペースから非表示になりますが、データは保持されます。 +2. 無効にしたいオブジェクトを見つけてクリックします +3. オブジェクトの **設定** タブに移動 +4. 「停止」ボタンをクリックしてください +5. オブジェクトはワークスペースから非表示になりますが、データは保持されます。 ### オブジェクトの再有効化 無効化したオブジェクトを再有効化するには: 1. 設定 → データモデル に移動 -2. 無効化されたオブジェクトを探します（グレー表示になります）。 -3. トグルをクリックして再有効化します -4. オブジェクトとそのすべてのデータが復元されます。 +2. 「無効」フィルタを有効にする +3. 無効化されたオブジェクトを探します(名前の隣に`無効化された`があります)。 +4. `⋮` をクリックしてから `Activate` をクリックして再有効化します +5. オブジェクトとそのすべてのデータが復元されます。 ## ベストプラクティス diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx index 344eeda4ca..84c281aca8 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ description: リレーションフィールドを使用して、異なるオブ -**ラボ機能**: 使用前に **Settings → Updates → Lab** でジャンクションリレーションを有効化する必要があります。 +**ラボの機能**: 使用する前に**設定 → コミュニティ → 機能**でジャンクションリレーションを有効にする必要があります。 完全なステップバイステップのガイドについては、[多対多リレーションの作成方法](/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations) を参照してください。 @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ description: リレーションフィールドを使用して、異なるオブ 1. **設定 → データモデル** に移動 2. リレーションを追加したいオブジェクトを選択します -3. **+ Add Field** をクリック +3. **+ 新規フィールド** をクリックしてください 4. フィールドタイプとして **Relation** を選択 5. 関連付け先のオブジェクトを選択します 6. リレーションの設定を行います: diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx index a52718042c..b0db600a91 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ description: 任意のオブジェクトにカスタムフィールドを追加 1. **設定 → データモデル** に移動 2. フィールドを追加するオブジェクトを選択します。 -3. **+ Add Field** をクリックします +3. **+ 新しいフィールド** をクリックします。 4. **フィールドタイプ** を選択してください (すべてのタイプについては [Fields](/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields) を参照してください) 5. **フィールド名** と説明を入力してください 6. フィールド固有の設定を構成します (下記参照) diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx index def9983686..279883c590 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ description: Twenty でカスタムオブジェクトを作成するためのス ## 手順 1. **設定 → データモデル** に移動 -2. **+ New object** をクリック +2. **+ オブジェクトを追加**をクリックします 3. 次を入力: * **単数名**（例: "Listing"） * **複数名**（例: "Listings"） @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ description: Twenty でカスタムオブジェクトを作成するためのス 新しいオブジェクトには基本フィールドがあらかじめ含まれています。 必要なデータを収集するために、カスタムフィールドを追加します: 1. **設定 → データモデル** で、対象のオブジェクトを選択します -2. **+ Add Field** をクリック +2. **+ 新しいフィールド** をクリックします。 3. フィールドタイプを選択し、設定して保存します フィールドタイプと設定の詳細は、[カスタムフィールドの作成方法](/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields)を参照してください。 @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ description: Twenty でカスタムオブジェクトを作成するためのス オブジェクトが不要になった場合: -1. **設定 → データモデル** に移動 -2. オブジェクトをオフに切り替えます +1. **設定 → データ モデル → 選択 → 設定** に移動 +2. **無効化**ボタンをクリックしてください オブジェクトは非表示になりますが、データは保持されます。 後で再有効化することも、完全に削除することもできます。 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx index e79f867882..60b50d80bb 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ People ←→ Project Assignments ←→ Projects まず、接続を保持する中間オブジェクトを作成します。 1. **設定 → データモデル** に移動します -2. **+ New object** をクリック +2. **+ オブジェクトを追加**をクリックします 3. わかりやすい名前を付けます（例: "Project Assignment"、"Team Member"、"Product Order"） 4. "Name フィールドの作成をスキップ" をオンに切り替えます diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx index e192bb7caf..314d1a7573 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ description: リレーションフィールドでオブジェクトを接続す 1. **Settings → Data Model** に移動します 2. リレーションを作成したいオブジェクト（通常は「many」側）を選択します -3. **+ Add Field** をクリックします +3. **+ New Field** をクリックします 4. フィールドタイプとして **Relation** を選択します 5. **対象オブジェクト** を選択します 6. **One-to-Many** または **Many-to-One** を選択します @@ -42,16 +42,26 @@ description: リレーションフィールドでオブジェクトを接続す これで、各 Person は Company にリンクでき、各 Company には People が表示されます。 -## リレーションの削除 +## リレーションの非アクティブ化 -1. **Settings → Data Model** に移動します -2. リレーションフィールドを見つけます -3. **⋮ → Deactivate** をクリックします +1. **Settings → Data Model → object of choice** に移動します +2. リレーションフィールドを見つけてクリックします +3. **Deactivate** ボタンをクリックします リンクは保持されますが非表示になります。 再有効化すると復元されます。 -**リレーションを削除しても、レコードは削除されません。** 削除されるのは、それらの間のリンクだけです。 +**リレーションを非アクティブ化しても、レコードは削除されません。** 削除されるのは、それらの間のリンクだけです。 + + +## リレーションの削除 + +1. **Settings → Data Model → object of choice** に移動します +2. リレーションフィールドを見つけてクリックします +3. **Delete** ボタンをクリックします + + +カスタムリレーションにのみ適用され、標準リレーションは非アクティブ化のみ可能です。 ## 関連 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx index 14feb6da05..b3204f8095 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx @@ -45,7 +45,6 @@ description: Twenty のデータモデルに関するよくある質問。 いいえ、作成後にフィールドの型は変更できません。 別の型が必要な場合は、正しい型の新しいフィールドを作成し、データを移行してから、古いフィールドを無効化してください。 - GraphQL APIは、異なる操作に対し両方の形式を使用します： * 単一のレコード操作には、`createPerson`（単数形） @@ -77,18 +76,16 @@ GraphQL APIは、異なる操作に対し両方の形式を使用します： -数式フィールドは**2026年Q1**に提供されます。 -数式フィールドは**2026年Q1**に提供されます。 その間、自動で計算してフィールド値を更新するワークフローを使用できます。 +数式フィールドは **H2 2026** に追加されます。 数式フィールドは**2026年Q1**に提供されます。 その間、自動で計算してフィールド値を更新するワークフローを使用できます。 -ネストされたフィールドは**2026年Q1**に提供されます。 現在、関連オブジェクトからフィールド値を取得するためのワークフローを使用できます。 例えば、人のレコードに会社の業界を表示するには、[People] にカスタムフィールドを作成し、ワークフローを使って値を同期します。 +Nested fields are coming in **H2 20226** . 現在、関連オブジェクトからフィールド値を取得するためのワークフローを使用できます。 例えば、人のレコードに会社の業界を表示するには、[People] にカスタムフィールドを作成し、ワークフローを使って値を同期します。 -フィールドの並び替えは**2025年Q4**のカスタムレイアウトで利用可能になります。 現在、フィールドはアルファベット順で表示されます。 -現在、フィールドはアルファベット順で表示されます。 +はい、設定 → データ モデル → お好みのオブジェクト → レイアウト を選択し、**レコードページのカスタマイズ**をクリックします。 このボタンが無効の場合は、レコードを作成する必要があります。 @@ -100,7 +97,7 @@ GraphQL APIは、異なる操作に対し両方の形式を使用します： -多対多のリレーションは**2026年上半期**に提供予定です。 現在は、回避策として、1 対多のリレーションを 2 つ持つ中間オブジェクトを作成してください。 +**H2 2026**には多くの関係があります。 現在は、回避策として、1 対多のリレーションを 2 つ持つ中間オブジェクトを作成してください。 例えば、People と Projects（多対多）を関連付けるには、"Project Assignments" オブジェクトを作成し、次の構成にします: * People へのリレーション（多数の割り当て → 1 人） @@ -154,6 +151,10 @@ GraphQL APIは、異なる操作に対し両方の形式を使用します： 現在、データモデル設定の組み込みエクスポート機能はありません。 ワークスペース間でデータモデルを移行する必要がある場合は、サポートにお問い合わせください。 + + +単一のオブジェクトが持つことができるフィールドの最大数は、Postgresの制限ごとに1600フィールドであり、既存のフィールドと削除されたフィールドの両方を含みます。 公正使用ポリシーに該当する1600フィールドの上限に達した場合、Twentyがワークスペースを修正しないことに注意してください。 + ## さらなるヘルプが必要ですか？ diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx index 43e238e0af..a9fc603d25 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx @@ -27,10 +27,6 @@ Twenty は次の SSO をサポートしています: * ID プロバイダーへの管理者アクセス権 * Twenty ワークスペースへの管理者アクセス権 - -**SSO をセットアップしたいセルフホストユーザーの方は**、contact@twenty.com までご連絡ください - - ### 構成手順 #### 1. SSO 設定にアクセス @@ -125,5 +121,5 @@ SSO ユーザーのアクセスを削除するには: * 構成の詳細（機微なデータを除く） - 組織向けに SSO の設定が必要ですか？ SSO とアイデンティティのセットアップを専門とする[認定済みの Twenty パートナーを探す](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso)。 *(Twenty に直接相談したい場合は、 [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com) までご連絡ください。)* +組織向けに SSO の設定が必要ですか？ SSO とアイデンティティのセットアップを専門とする[認定済みの Twenty パートナーを探す](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso)。 *(Twenty に直接相談したい場合は、 [contact@20y.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com)* diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx index 08a322d097..bedece17db 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx @@ -7,15 +7,14 @@ description: ワークスペースのドメイン、承認済みアクセスド ## ワークスペースドメイン -**設定 → 一般 → ワークスペースドメイン** で設定します。 +**設定 → 一般**で設定します。 サブドメイン名を編集するか、ワークスペース用にカスタムドメインを設定します。 ### ドメインをカスタマイズ -1. **Customize Domain** をクリック -2. サブドメインを編集します（例: `yourcompany.twenty.com`） -3. またはカスタムドメインを設定します（例: `crm.yourcompany.com`） +1. **Subdomain** をクリックしてサブドメインを編集します（例: `yourcompany.20y.com`） +2. または、**カスタムドメイン** をクリックしてカスタムドメインを設定します（例: `crm.yourcompany.com`） カスタムドメインの場合は、ドメインプロバイダー側で DNS 設定を構成する必要があります。 @@ -45,7 +44,7 @@ Web 上でルートを公開するアプリは、専用の URL から配信さ ### カスタムドメインを追加 -1. **Add Custom Domain** をクリックします +1. **カスタムドメイン** をクリックします。 2. 使用したいドメインを入力します（例: `app.yourcompany.com`） 3. 指示に従って DNS 設定を構成します 4. ドメインを検証します diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx index d14c88adbe..641c5790ca 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ description: チームメンバーを招待し、ワークスペースのアク ### メール招待を使用する -1. **設定 → メンバー** に移動 +1. **設定 → メンバー → 招待** に移動します 2. **+ 招待** をクリック 3. その人のメールアドレスを入力 4. 新しいメンバーのロールを選択します。 @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ description: チームメンバーを招待し、ワークスペースのアク ### 招待リンクを使用する -1. **設定 → メンバー** に移動 +1. **設定 → メンバー → 招待** に移動します 2. ワークスペースの招待リンクをコピー 3. 新しいチームメンバーにリンクを共有 4. サインアップするとアクセスできるようになります @@ -28,10 +28,9 @@ description: チームメンバーを招待し、ワークスペースのアク ### すべてのメンバーを表示 -**設定 → メンバー** に移動すると、次を確認できます: +**設定 → メンバー → チーム** に移動して、すべてのアクティブなメンバーを表示 -* すべてのアクティブなメンバー -* 保留中の招待 +保留中の招待状を表示するには、\*\*設定 → メンバー → 招待 ### メンバーのプロフィールを編集 @@ -56,15 +55,15 @@ description: チームメンバーを招待し、ワークスペースのアク ### メンバーを削除 1. メンバーをクリックしてプロフィールを開きます。 -2. ワークスペースから削除するには **削除** をクリックします。 +2. ワークスペースから削除するには、**アカウントを削除**をクリックしてください 削除されたメンバーは直ちにアクセス権を失います。 そのデータ（レコード、メモ、タスク）はワークスペースに残ります。 - -**メール同期も削除されます。** もし削除されたユーザーだけが特定のメールを同期していた場合、そのメールはワークスペースから完全に削除されます。 - + +削除されたユーザーの電子メールとカレンダーイベントはアーカイブされ、他のユーザーが利用できます。 + ## 保留中の招待 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx index 5d7cd72369..8466f39e76 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ description: 個人プロフィールとセキュリティ設定を管理しま アカウントに追加のセキュリティ層を追加するために2FAを有効にします： -1. **設定 → プロフィール設定** へ移動 -2. **2FA有効化**をクリック +1. **設定 → プロフィール** に移動 +2. **認証アプリ** をクリックします。 3. 認証アプリでQRコードをスキャンします 4. 確認するために認証コードを入力します @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ description: 個人プロフィールとセキュリティ設定を管理しま アカウントを削除するには： -1. **設定 → プロフィール設定** へ移動 +1. **設定 → プロフィール** に移動 2. **危険地帯**までスクロールします 3. **アカウント削除**をクリックします 4. メールアドレスを入力して確認します diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx index a400951ecf..5a94c400d8 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ description: Twenty の設定に関するよくある質問。 -早期アクセス機能は、一般提供に先立って検証中の機能です。 現在、早期アクセスの対象は **ダッシュボード** のみです。 ユーザーからのフィードバックに基づいて変更される場合があります。 +早期アクセス機能は、一般提供に先立って検証中の機能です。 現在、**ジャンクションリレーション** と **カレンダーと週表示** のみが早期アクセスできます。 ユーザーからのフィードバックに基づいて変更される場合があります。 @@ -162,9 +162,10 @@ description: Twenty の設定に関するよくある質問。 -1. **設定 → 更新 → 早期アクセス**に移動します -2. 有効にしたい機能を見つけます -3. オンに切り替えます -4. 機能はすぐに利用可能になります +1. **設定 → コミュニティ** に移動 +2. **機能** セクションまでスクロールします。 +3. 有効にしたい機能を見つけます +4. オンに切り替えます +5. 機能はすぐに利用可能になります diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx index 51916b8b15..e027c3c304 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ description: 日付フィールドのあるレコードをカレンダーに表 1. 日付フィールドのあるオブジェクトに移動します 2. ビューのドロップダウンをクリックし、**+ ビューを追加**を選択します -3. ビューに名前を付け、**作成**をクリックします +3. ビューに名前を付け、**作成**をクリック 4. 右側の**オプション**を開きます 5. レイアウトとして**カレンダー**を選択します 6. レコードの配置に使用する**日付フィールド**を選択します diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx index 181dc83458..7c1644bc11 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ja/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx @@ -26,4 +26,4 @@ description: Twenty のチームおよび認定パートナーから、複雑な ### 実装パートナー -認定パートナーと連携して、高度なカスタマイズを行います。 認定パートナーと連携して、高度なカスタマイズを行います。 [実装パートナー](https://twenty.com/partners)に関するお問い合わせはcontact@twenty.comまでご連絡ください。 +認定パートナーと連携して、高度なカスタマイズを行います。 [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com) までお問い合わせいただき、[implementation partners](https://twenty.com/partners)とつながりましょう。 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx index 0d78dd08fb..2f56b41599 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ export default definePageLayout({ ### 핵심 요점 -* `type`은 일반적으로 특정 객체의 상세 보기를 사용자 지정하기 위해 'RECORD_PAGE'입니다. +* `type`은 `'RECORD_INDEX'`, `'RECORD_PAGE'`, `'DASHBOARD'`, `'STANDALONE_PAGE'` 중 하나입니다. 'RECORD_PAGE'를 사용하면 특정 객체의 상세 보기를 사용자 지정할 수 있습니다. * `objectUniversalIdentifier`는 이 레이아웃이 적용되는 객체를 지정합니다. * 각 `tab`은 `title`, `position`, `layoutMode`(`VERTICAL_LIST`는 레코드 페이지용, `GRID`는 대시보드용)를 통해 페이지의 섹션을 정의합니다. 단일 위젯이 있는 탭은 자동으로 전체 너비로 렌더링되며, 여러 위젯이 있으면 카드 형태로 위에서 아래로 쌓입니다. * 탭 내부의 각 `widget`은 [front component](/l/ko/developers/extend/apps/layout/front-components), 관계 목록 또는 기타 기본 제공 위젯 타입을 렌더링할 수 있습니다. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx index a2001faa45..e14bb11778 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx @@ -171,6 +171,28 @@ plugins: [ 프로덕션 환경에서는 로직 함수가 기본적으로 비활성화되어 있습니다. 이를 활성화하려면 `LOGIC_FUNCTION_TYPE` 환경 변수를 `LOCAL` 또는 `LAMBDA`로 설정하세요. 이는 환경 변수를 통해서나 관리자 패널의 데이터베이스 변수를 통해 구성할 수 있습니다. 자세한 내용은 [로직 함수 설정 가이드](/l/ko/developers/self-host/capabilities/setup#logic-functions-available-drivers)를 참조하세요. +#### AI 채팅에 메시지를 입력하면 바로 응답하지 않고, 답변을 보려면 페이지를 새로고침해야 합니다 + +다음 블록을 nginx 구성에 추가하세요 + +``` +location ~* ^/api/.*stream|\/graphql\/stream { +proxy_pass http://twenty_backend; +proxy_http_version 1.1; +proxy_set_header Connection ""; +proxy_set_header Host $host; +proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-For $proxy_add_x_forwarded_for; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme; +proxy_buffering off; +proxy_request_buffering off; +proxy_cache off; +gzip off; +#chunked_transfer_encoding off; +add_header X-Accel-Buffering no always; +} +``` + ### 1-클릭 Docker 구성 #### 로그인할 수 없음 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/navigation.json b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/navigation.json index 6ba91ec769..43a5e47fed 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/navigation.json +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/navigation.json @@ -145,6 +145,14 @@ "label": "사용 방법" } } + }, + "legal": { + "label": "법무", + "groups": { + "legalHowTos": { + "label": "사용 방법" + } + } } } }, diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx index 920bb419fa..b58d047d0c 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Twenty는 하나의 레코드가 여러 다른 레코드에 연결되는 표준 * 여러 사람이 여러 프로젝트에 연결되는 경우 -다대다 관계는 2026년 상반기에 제공될 예정입니다. +다대다 관계는 2026년 하반기에 제공될 예정입니다. ## 가져오기 중 레코드 연결 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx index 7e0555645f..b14f892291 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Twenty는 다양한 필드 유형을 지원합니다: 1. 왼쪽 사이드바에서 `설정`으로 이동합니다. 2. `데이터 모델`로 이동한 다음 사용자 지정하려는 객체를 선택합니다. -3. `필드 추가`를 클릭하여 계속 진행합니다. +3. `+ New Field`를 클릭하여 계속 진행합니다. 4. 요구 사항에 맞는 필드 이름과 유형을 선택합니다. 더 나은 이해를 위해 필드 설명을 추가하는 것을 고려하세요. 새로 생성된 필드는 애플리케이션의 필드 내에서 사용 가능합니다. 특정 보기에서 표시하려면 옵션 메뉴를 클릭한 다음 `필드`를 선택하세요. @@ -78,9 +78,7 @@ Twenty는 다양한 필드 유형을 지원합니다: 다음은 비활성화 방법입니다: 1. 객체 설정에서 비활성화하려는 필드를 찾습니다. - 2. 필드 옆에 있는 세 점 `⋮`을 클릭하여 메뉴를 엽니다. - 3. 드롭다운에서 `비활성화`를 선택합니다. @@ -88,9 +86,7 @@ Twenty는 다양한 필드 유형을 지원합니다: 필드를 비활성화하면 어떻게 되나요? 1. **앱 안에서:** 필드가 사라지며 더 이상 새로운 값을 추가할 수 없습니다. - 2. **기존 관계:** 관계 필드인 경우 기존 연결은 유지되지만 새 연결을 만들 수 없습니다. - 3. **API 액세스:** 여전히 API를 통해 필드와 그 데이터를 액세스할 수 있습니다. 표준 및 사용자 정의 필드를 다시 활성화하거나 영구적으로 삭제할 수 있는 옵션이 있습니다. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx index 50544a9521..73179e968b 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx @@ -47,7 +47,6 @@ import { VimeoEmbed } from '/snippets/vimeo-embed.mdx'; 3. 상단에서 `+ New object`를 클릭하세요. 단수 및 복수 이름을 입력하고 아이콘을 선택한 다음 사용자 정의 객체에 대한 설명을 추가하고 저장(오른쪽 상단)을 누릅니다. 사용자 지정 객체의 예로 Listing을 사용할 경우, 단수형은 "listing", 복수형은 "listings"이며, 설명은 "호스트가 숙소를 홍보하기 위해 생성한 목록"처럼 작성할 수 있습니다. - 4. 이제 사용자 지정 객체가 생성되어 사이드바에 표시됩니다. 바로 레코드를 추가할 수 있습니다. ## 객체 관리 @@ -57,18 +56,20 @@ import { VimeoEmbed } from '/snippets/vimeo-embed.mdx'; 표준 또는 사용자 지정 객체가 필요하지 않은 경우: 1. 설정 → 데이터 모델로 이동하세요 -2. 비활성화하려는 객체를 찾으세요 -3. 토글을 클릭해 비활성화하세요 -4. 객체는 워크스페이스에서 숨겨지지만 데이터는 유지됩니다 +2. 비활성화하려는 객체를 찾아 클릭하세요 +3. 객체의 **Settings** 탭으로 이동하세요 +4. `Deactivate` 버튼을 클릭하세요 +5. 객체는 워크스페이스에서 숨겨지지만 데이터는 유지됩니다 ### 객체 재활성화 비활성화된 객체를 다시 사용하려면: 1. 설정 → 데이터 모델로 이동하세요 -2. 비활성화된 객체를 찾으세요(회색으로 표시됩니다) -3. 토글을 클릭해 다시 활성화하세요 -4. 객체와 해당 모든 데이터가 복원됩니다 +2. `Deactivated` 필터를 활성화하세요 +3. 비활성화된 객체를 찾으세요(이름 옆에 `Deactivated`가 표시됩니다) +4. `⋮`를 클릭한 다음 `Activate`를 클릭해 다시 활성화하세요 +5. 객체와 해당 모든 데이터가 복원됩니다 ## 모범 사례 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx index e365f22a6d..af3f8d4b18 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ description: 관계 필드를 사용하여 서로 다른 객체의 레코드를 -**실험실 기능**: 사용하려면 **Settings → Updates → Lab**에서 연결 관계를 활성화해야 합니다. +**실험실 기능**: 사용하려면 **Settings → Community → Features**에서 연결 관계를 활성화해야 합니다. 자세한 단계별 가이드는 [다대다 관계 생성 방법](/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations)을 참조하세요. @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ description: 관계 필드를 사용하여 서로 다른 객체의 레코드를 1. **설정 → 데이터 모델**로 이동 2. 관계를 추가하려는 객체를 선택합니다. -3. **+ 필드 추가**를 클릭합니다. +3. **+ New field**를 클릭하세요 4. 필드 유형으로 **관계**를 선택합니다. 5. 연결할 대상 객체를 선택합니다. 6. 관계 설정을 구성합니다: diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx index 44dfd391dc..6865fc6d00 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ description: 모든 객체에 사용자 정의 필드를 추가하는 단계별 1. **설정 → 데이터 모델**로 이동 2. 필드를 추가하려는 객체를 선택합니다. -3. **+ 필드 추가**를 클릭합니다. +3. **+ 새 필드**를 클릭합니다 4. **필드 유형**을 선택합니다(모든 유형은 [필드](/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields)에서 확인하세요) 5. **필드 이름**과 선택적 설명을 입력합니다 6. 필드별 설정을 구성합니다(아래 참조) diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx index ebfbeec76f..c431994797 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ description: Twenty에서 사용자 정의 객체를 생성하는 단계별 가 ## 단계 1. **설정 → 데이터 모델**로 이동 -2. **+ 새 객체**를 클릭합니다 +2. **+ 객체 추가**를 클릭합니다 3. 다음을 입력하세요: * **단수 이름**(예: "Listing") * **복수 이름**(예: "Listings") @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ description: Twenty에서 사용자 정의 객체를 생성하는 단계별 가 새 객체는 기본 필드로 시작합니다. 필요한 데이터를 수집할 수 있도록 사용자 정의 필드를 추가하세요: 1. **설정 → 데이터 모델**에서 객체를 선택합니다 -2. **+ 필드 추가**를 클릭합니다 +2. **+ 새 필드**를 클릭합니다 3. 필드 유형을 선택하고 구성한 뒤 저장합니다 필드 유형과 구성에 대한 자세한 내용은 [사용자 정의 필드 생성 방법](/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields)을 참조하세요. @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ description: Twenty에서 사용자 정의 객체를 생성하는 단계별 가 객체가 더 이상 필요하지 않은 경우: -1. **설정 → 데이터 모델**로 이동 -2. 객체를 비활성화로 전환합니다 +1. **Settings → Data Model → object of choice → Settings**로 이동합니다 +2. **Deactivate** 버튼을 클릭합니다 객체는 숨겨지지만 데이터는 보존됩니다. 나중에 다시 활성화하거나 영구적으로 삭제할 수 있습니다. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx index f42703f3f0..6c79851733 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ People ←→ Project Assignments ←→ Projects 먼저, 연결을 보관할 중간 오브젝트를 만드세요. 1. **설정 → 데이터 모델**로 이동 -2. **+ 새 객체**를 클릭합니다 +2. **+ 객체 추가**를 클릭합니다 3. 설명을 담은 이름을 지정하세요(예: "Project Assignment", "Team Member", "Product Order") 4. "이름 필드 생성을 건너뛰기"를 켭니다 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx index 77038d75ea..fbca54e92a 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ description: 관계 필드를 사용하여 객체를 연결하는 단계별 가 1. **설정 → 데이터 모델**로 이동 2. 관계를 만들 객체(보통 "다수" 측)를 선택합니다. -3. **+ 필드 추가**를 클릭합니다. +3. **+ New Field**를 클릭합니다 4. 필드 유형으로 **관계**를 선택합니다. 5. **대상 객체**를 선택합니다. 6. **일대다** 또는 **다대일**을 선택합니다. @@ -42,16 +42,26 @@ description: 관계 필드를 사용하여 객체를 연결하는 단계별 가 이제 각 사람을 회사에 연결할 수 있고, 각 회사에는 연결된 사람들이 표시됩니다. -## 관계 삭제 +## 관계 비활성화 -1. **설정 → 데이터 모델**로 이동 -2. 관계 필드를 찾습니다. -3. **⋮ → 비활성화**를 클릭합니다. +1. **설정 → 데이터 모델 → 원하는 오브젝트**로 이동 +2. 관계 필드를 찾아 클릭합니다 +3. **비활성화** 버튼을 클릭합니다 연결은 유지되지만 숨겨집니다. 복원하려면 다시 활성화하세요. -**관계를 삭제해도 레코드는 삭제되지 않습니다.** 둘 사이의 연결만 제거됩니다. +**관계를 비활성화해도 레코드는 삭제되지 않습니다.** 둘 사이의 연결만 제거됩니다. + + +## 관계 삭제 + +1. **설정 → 데이터 모델 → 원하는 오브젝트**로 이동 +2. 관계 필드를 찾아 클릭합니다 +3. **삭제** 버튼을 클릭합니다 + + +사용자 지정 관계에만 적용되며, 표준 관계는 비활성화만 할 수 있습니다. ## 관련 항목 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx index cf395793b1..7464202240 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx @@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ description: Twenty의 데이터 모델에 대한 자주 묻는 질문입니다. 아니요, 생성 후에는 필드 유형을 변경할 수 없습니다. 다른 유형이 필요하다면 올바른 유형의 새 필드를 만들고 데이터를 마이그레이션한 다음 이전 필드를 비활성화하세요. - 우리의 GraphQL API는 다양한 작업에서 두 형식을 모두 사용합니다: * 단일 기록 작업을 위한 `createPerson` (단수) @@ -73,15 +72,15 @@ description: Twenty의 데이터 모델에 대한 자주 묻는 질문입니다. -수식 필드는 **2026년 1분기**에 제공될 예정입니다. 현재는 워크플로를 사용하여 필드 값을 자동으로 계산하고 업데이트할 수 있습니다. +수식 필드는 **2026년 하반기**에 제공될 예정입니다. 현재는 워크플로를 사용하여 필드 값을 자동으로 계산하고 업데이트할 수 있습니다. -중첩 필드는 **2026년 1분기**에 제공될 예정입니다. 현재로서는 관련 객체의 필드 값을 가져오려면 워크플로를 사용할 수 있습니다. 예를 들어, 회사의 산업을 사람 기록에 표시하려면 사람에 대한 사용자 정의 필드를 만들고 워크플로를 사용하여 값을 동기화하세요. +중첩 필드는 **2026년 하반기**에 제공될 예정입니다. 현재로서는 관련 객체의 필드 값을 가져오려면 워크플로를 사용할 수 있습니다. 예를 들어, 회사의 산업을 사람 기록에 표시하려면 사람에 대한 사용자 정의 필드를 만들고 워크플로를 사용하여 값을 동기화하세요. -필드 정렬은 **2025년 4분기**에 사용자 정의 레이아웃과 함께 제공될 예정입니다. 현재 필드는 알파벳 순으로 표시됩니다. +예, Settings → Data model → 원하는 object → Layout으로 이동한 다음 **Customize record page**를 클릭하세요. 이 버튼이 비활성화되어 있다면, 레코드를 하나 생성해야 합니다. @@ -93,7 +92,7 @@ description: Twenty의 데이터 모델에 대한 자주 묻는 질문입니다. -다대다 관계는 **2026년 상반기**에 제공될 예정입니다. 현재는 우회 방법으로 두 개의 1대다 관계를 가진 중간 객체를 만드세요. +다대다 관계는 **2026년 하반기**에 제공될 예정입니다. 현재는 우회 방법으로 두 개의 1대다 관계를 가진 중간 객체를 만드세요. 예를 들어 People과 Projects를 연결(다대다)하려면 "Project Assignments" 객체를 만들고 다음을 포함하세요: * People에 대한 관계(여러 할당 → 한 사람) @@ -147,6 +146,10 @@ description: Twenty의 데이터 모델에 대한 자주 묻는 질문입니다. 현재 데이터 모델 구성에 대한 내장된 내보내기 기능은 없습니다. 워크스페이스 간에 데이터 모델을 마이그레이션해야 하는 경우 지원팀에 문의하세요. + + +하나의 object에 가질 수 있는 필드 수의 최대값은 Postgres 제한에 따라, 기존 필드와 삭제된 필드를 모두 포함해 1600개입니다. 1600개 필드 제한에 도달하면, 이는 당사의 공정 사용 Fair Usage 정책에 해당하므로 Twenty에서는 워크스페이스를 수정해 주지 않는다는 점에 유의하세요. + ## 추가 도움이 필요하십니까? diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx index 7850df5b9d..1b12174600 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx @@ -27,10 +27,6 @@ Twenty는 다음 제공자와 SSO를 지원합니다: * 아이덴티티 제공자에 대한 관리자 권한 * Twenty 워크스페이스에 대한 관리자 권한 - -**SSO 설정을 원하는 셀프 호스팅 사용자**는 contact@twenty.com으로 문의하세요 - - ### 구성 단계 #### 1. SSO 설정에 액세스 @@ -125,5 +121,5 @@ SSO 사용자의 액세스를 제거하려면: * 구성 세부 정보(민감한 데이터 제외) - 조직에 SSO 구성이 필요하신가요? SSO 및 ID 설정을 전문으로 하는 [공인 Twenty 파트너를 찾아보세요](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso). *(Twenty와 직접 논의하길 원하시나요? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com)을(를) 통해 문의하세요.)* +조직에 SSO 구성이 필요하신가요? SSO 및 ID 설정을 전문으로 하는 [공인 Twenty 파트너를 찾아보세요](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso). *(Twenty와 직접 논의하길 원하시나요? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com))* diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx index af1f04c6b0..6c808bebea 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx @@ -7,15 +7,14 @@ description: 작업 공간 도메인, 승인된 액세스 도메인 및 앱 사 ## 워크스페이스 도메인 -**설정 → 일반 → 워크스페이스 도메인**에서 구성하세요. +**Settings → General**에서 구성하세요. 하위 도메인 이름을 편집하거나 작업 공간에 사용자 지정 도메인을 설정하세요. ### 도메인 사용자 지정 -1. **도메인 사용자 지정**을 클릭하세요 -2. 하위 도메인을 편집하세요(예: `yourcompany.twenty.com`) -3. 또는 사용자 지정 도메인을 설정하세요(예: `crm.yourcompany.com`) +1. **Subdomain**을 클릭하여 하위 도메인을 편집하세요(예: `yourcompany.twenty.com`) +2. 또는 **Custom domain**을 클릭하여 사용자 지정 도메인을 설정하세요(예: `crm.yourcompany.com`) 사용자 지정 도메인의 경우 도메인 제공업체에서 DNS 설정을 구성해야 합니다. @@ -45,7 +44,7 @@ description: 작업 공간 도메인, 승인된 액세스 도메인 및 앱 사 ### 사용자 지정 도메인 추가 -1. **사용자 지정 도메인 추가**를 클릭하세요 +1. **Custom Domain**을 클릭하세요 2. 사용하려는 도메인을 입력하세요(예: `app.yourcompany.com`) 3. 안내에 따라 DNS 설정을 구성하세요 4. 도메인을 검증하세요 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx index 1919841c5c..3fde1bf8d0 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ description: 팀원을 초대하고 워크스페이스 접근 권한을 관리 ### 이메일 초대 사용 -1. **설정 → 구성원**으로 이동하세요. +1. **설정 → 구성원 → 초대**로 이동하세요 2. **+ 초대**를 클릭하세요. 3. 해당 사람의 이메일 주소를 입력하세요. 4. 새 구성원의 역할을 선택하세요. @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ description: 팀원을 초대하고 워크스페이스 접근 권한을 관리 ### 초대 링크 사용 -1. **설정 → 구성원**으로 이동하세요. +1. **설정 → 구성원 → 초대**로 이동하세요 2. 작업 공간 초대 링크 복사 3. 새로운 팀 구성원에게 링크 공유 4. 가입 후 접근이 가능합니다 @@ -28,10 +28,9 @@ description: 팀원을 초대하고 워크스페이스 접근 권한을 관리 ### 모든 구성원 보기 -**설정 → 구성원**으로 이동하여 다음을 확인하세요: +모든 활성 멤버를 보려면 **Settings → Members → Team**으로 이동하세요 -* 모든 활성 구성원 -* 보류 중인 초대 +대기 중인 초대를 보려면 **Settings → Members → Invite**로 이동하세요 ### 구성원 프로필 편집 @@ -56,15 +55,15 @@ description: 팀원을 초대하고 워크스페이스 접근 권한을 관리 ### 구성원 제거 1. 구성원을 클릭하여 프로필을 엽니다. -2. 워크스페이스에서 제거하려면 **삭제**를 클릭하세요. +2. 워크스페이스에서 제거하려면 **Delete account**를 클릭하세요 제거된 구성원은 즉시 접근 권한을 잃습니다. 해당 구성원의 데이터(레코드, 노트, 작업)는 워크스페이스에 남아 있습니다. - -**이메일 동기화도 제거됩니다.** 삭제된 사용자가 특정 이메일을 동기화한 유일한 사용자였다면 해당 이메일은 워크스페이스에서 영구적으로 제거됩니다. - + +삭제된 사용자의 이메일과 캘린더 이벤트는 보관되며 다른 사용자가 열람할 수 있습니다. + ## 보류 중인 초대 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx index 0f64507292..5c43b764a4 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ description: 개인 프로필 및 보안 설정을 관리합니다. 계정에 추가 보안을 위한 2FA를 활성화하십시오: -1. **설정 → 프로필 설정**으로 이동합니다 -2. **2FA 활성화** 클릭 +1. **설정 → 프로필**로 이동하세요. +2. **인증 앱**을 클릭하세요. 3. 인증 앱으로 QR 코드를 스캔합니다 4. 확인을 위해 인증 코드를 입력합니다 @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ description: 개인 프로필 및 보안 설정을 관리합니다. 계정을 삭제하려면: -1. **설정 → 프로필 설정**으로 이동합니다 +1. **설정 → 프로필**로 이동하세요. 2. **위험 구역**까지 스크롤하세요. 3. **계정 삭제** 클릭 4. 이메일 주소를 입력하여 확인합니다 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx index 8107644abf..e873a3209a 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ description: Twenty 설정에 대한 자주 묻는 질문입니다. -얼리 액세스 기능은 일반 출시 전에 테스트 중인 기능입니다. 현재는 **대시보드**만 얼리 액세스로 제공됩니다. 사용자 피드백에 따라 변경될 수 있습니다. +얼리 액세스 기능은 일반 출시 전에 테스트 중인 기능입니다. 현재는 **Junction relations**와 **Calendar Day and Week Views**만 Early Access 단계입니다. 사용자 피드백에 따라 변경될 수 있습니다. @@ -162,9 +162,10 @@ description: Twenty 설정에 대한 자주 묻는 질문입니다. -1. **설정 → 업데이트 → 얼리 액세스**로 이동하세요 -2. 원하는 기능을 찾으세요. -3. 토글하여 활성화하세요. -4. 해당 기능이 즉시 사용 가능해집니다. +1. **설정 → Community**로 이동하세요 +2. 아래로 스크롤하여 **Features** 섹션으로 이동하세요 +3. 원하는 기능을 찾으세요. +4. 토글하여 활성화하세요. +5. 해당 기능이 즉시 사용 가능해집니다. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx index 31bfa4f9f1..6295c26e63 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ description: 날짜 필드가 있는 레코드를 캘린더에 표시합니다. 1. 날짜 필드가 있는 오브젝트로 이동합니다. 2. 뷰 드롭다운에서 → **+ 뷰 추가**를 클릭합니다. -3. 뷰에 이름을 지정하고 **생성**을 클릭합니다. +3. 뷰에 이름을 지정하고 **Create**를 클릭합니다 4. 오른쪽의 **옵션**을 엽니다. 5. 레이아웃으로 **캘린더**를 선택합니다. 6. 레코드의 배치를 위해 사용할 **날짜 필드**를 선택합니다. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx index 20915b86e8..2cc4d9a064 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ko/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx @@ -26,4 +26,4 @@ description: Twenty 팀과 인증된 파트너로부터 복잡한 워크플로 ### 구현 파트너 -고급 맞춤 설정을 위해 인증된 파트너와 협력하십시오. 우리의 [구현 파트너](https://twenty.com/partners)와 연결하려면 contact@twenty.com으로 문의하십시오. +고급 맞춤 설정을 위해 인증된 파트너와 협력하십시오. [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com)으로 문의하시어 저희 [구현 파트너](https://twenty.com/partners)와 연결해 보세요. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx index 08d35aa631..f136fdb001 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ export default definePageLayout({ ### Pontos-chave -* `type` geralmente é `'RECORD_PAGE'` para personalizar a visualização de detalhes de um objeto específico. +* `type` é um dos seguintes: `'RECORD_INDEX'`, `'RECORD_PAGE'`, `'DASHBOARD'` ou `'STANDALONE_PAGE'`. Use `'RECORD_PAGE'` para personalizar a visualização de detalhes de um objeto específico. * `objectUniversalIdentifier` especifica a qual objeto este layout se aplica. * Cada `tab` define uma seção da página com um `title`, `position` e `layoutMode` (`VERTICAL_LIST` para páginas de registro, `GRID` para dashboards). Uma aba contendo um único widget o renderiza automaticamente em largura total; com vários widgets, eles são empilhados como cards. * Cada `widget` dentro de uma aba pode renderizar um [front component](/l/pt/developers/extend/apps/layout/front-components), uma lista de relações ou outros tipos de widget nativos. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx index 698fbaa8c1..102e83f1b0 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx @@ -171,6 +171,28 @@ Execute `UPDATE core."user" SET "canAccessFullAdminPanel" = TRUE WHERE email = ' Em produção, as funções de lógica estão desativadas por padrão. Defina a variável de ambiente `LOGIC_FUNCTION_TYPE` como `LOCAL` ou `LAMBDA` para ativá-las. Isso pode ser configurado por meio de variáveis de ambiente ou pelas variáveis de banco de dados do painel de administração. Veja o [guia de configuração de Funções de Lógica](/l/pt/developers/self-host/capabilities/setup#logic-functions-available-drivers) para obter detalhes. +#### Quando digito uma mensagem no chat AI, ela não responde imediatamente e preciso atualizar a página para ver a resposta + +Adicionar seguinte bloco à configuração nginx + +``` +location ~* ^/api/.*stream|\/graphql\/stream { +proxy_pass http://twenty_backend; +proxy_http_version 1.1; +proxy_set_header Connection ""; +proxy_set_header Host $host; +proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-For $proxy_add_x_forwarded_for; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme; +proxy_buffering off; +proxy_request_buffering off; +proxy_cache off; +gzip off; +#chunked_transfer_encoding off; +add_header X-Accel-Buffering no always; +} +``` + ### Docker compose com um clique #### Impossível efetuar login diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/navigation.json b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/navigation.json index fee46c3f48..849c65e0e5 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/navigation.json +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/navigation.json @@ -145,6 +145,14 @@ "label": "Como-Tos" } } + }, + "legal": { + "label": "Jurídico", + "groups": { + "legalHowTos": { + "label": "Tutoriais" + } + } } } }, diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx index cea6b776c3..8033313323 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Isto está no nosso roadmap. * Muitas Pessoas estão ligadas a muitos Projetos -Relações muitos-para-muitos estão planeadas para o 1.º semestre de 2026. +Relações muitos-para-muitos estão planeadas para o 2.º semestre de 2026. ## Ligar registos durante a importação diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx index 8922de5886..9227331ce9 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Para adicionar um campo personalizado a qualquer objeto, siga estas etapas: 1. Acesse `Configurações` na barra lateral esquerda. 2. Acesse `Modelo de Dados`, depois selecione o objeto que você deseja personalizar. -3. Prossiga clicando em `Adicionar Campo`. +3. Prossiga clicando em `+ New Field`. 4. Escolha um nome e tipo de campo que atenda aos seus requisitos. Considere adicionar uma descrição do campo para um melhor entendimento. Seu novo campo agora está disponível dentro dos campos do aplicativo. Para exibi-lo em uma vista específica, clique no menu de opções e selecione `Campos`. @@ -78,9 +78,7 @@ Você pode desativar um campo para ocultá-lo no aplicativo sem perder seus dado Veja como você pode fazer isso: 1. Encontre o campo que deseja desativar nas configurações do seu objeto. - 2. Clique nos três pontos `⋮` ao lado do campo para abrir o menu. - 3. Selecione `Desativar` no menu suspenso. @@ -88,9 +86,7 @@ Veja como você pode fazer isso: O que acontece quando você desativa um campo? 1. **No aplicativo:** O campo desaparece e você não pode adicionar novos valores a ele. - 2. **Relações existentes:** Se for um campo de relação, conexões existentes permanecem, mas não é possível criar novas. - 3. **Acesso API:** Você ainda pode acessar o campo e seus dados através da API. Você pode reativar Campos Padrão e Personalizados ou ter a opção de excluí-los permanentemente. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx index ce2c2f316f..b34e693cd2 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Objetos padrão são entidades predefinidas no seu espaço de trabalho para ajud O objeto `Pessoas` armazena seus contatos. Inclui detalhes de contato e histórico de interação, para que você possa ver todas as interações com seus clientes em um só lugar. -### Empresa +### Empresas O objeto `Empresas` armazena suas contas comerciais. Inclui detalhes como setor, tamanho e localização. Empresas conectam-se tanto aos objetos `Pessoas` quanto `Oportunidades`. @@ -47,7 +47,6 @@ Para criar um novo objeto personalizado: 3. Clique em `+ Novo objeto` no topo. Digite o nome (tanto no singular quanto no plural), escolha um ícone e adicione uma descrição para o seu objeto personalizado e clique em Salvar (no canto superior direito). Usando Listagem como exemplo de objeto personalizado, o singular seria "listagem" e o plural seria "listagens", juntamente com uma descrição como "Listagens que anfitriões criaram para exibir sua propriedade." - 4. Seu objeto personalizado foi criado e aparecerá na sua barra lateral. Você já pode começar a adicionar registros a ele. ## Gerenciando objetos @@ -57,18 +56,20 @@ Para criar um novo objeto personalizado: Se você não precisar de um objeto padrão ou personalizado: 1. Vá para Configurações → Modelo de Dados -2. Encontre o objeto que você deseja desativar -3. Clique no botão de alternância para desativá-lo -4. O objeto ficará oculto no seu espaço de trabalho, mas os dados serão preservados +2. Encontre o objeto que deseja desativar e clique nele +3. Ir para a guia **Configurações** do objeto +4. Clique no botão `Desativar` +5. O objeto ficará oculto no seu espaço de trabalho, mas os dados serão preservados ### Reativando objetos Para restaurar um objeto desativado: 1. Vá para Configurações → Modelo de Dados -2. Procure por objetos desativados (eles aparecerão acinzentados) -3. Clique no botão de alternância para reativá-lo -4. O objeto e todos os seus dados serão restaurados +2. Ativar filtro `Desativado` +3. Procure por objetos desativados (eles têm `desativado` ao lado de seu nome) +4. Clique em 'se' e, em seguida, em 'Ativar' para reativá-lo +5. O objeto e todos os seus dados serão restaurados ## Melhores Práticas diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx index 003f0a4e6d..2e56424b39 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ As relações muitos-para-muitos utilizam um padrão de **objeto de junção**: -**Recurso de laboratório**: As relações de junção devem ser ativadas em **Configurações → Atualizações → Lab** antes do uso. +**Recurso de laboratório**: Relações de junção devem ser ativadas em **Configurações → Comunidade → Recursos** antes do uso. Consulte [Como criar relações muitos-para-muitos](/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations) para um guia passo a passo completo. @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Consulte [Como criar relações muitos-para-muitos](/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/ 1. Vá a **Definições → Modelo de Dados** 2. Selecione o objeto onde pretende adicionar a relação -3. Clique em **+ Adicionar campo** +3. Clique em **+ Novo campo** 4. Selecione **Relação** como o tipo de campo 5. Escolha o(s) objeto(s) de destino a relacionar 6. Configure as definições da relação: diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx index 1a8e7c2a42..01d40dc2bb 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Os campos personalizados permitem capturar informações específicas do seu neg 1. Vá a **Definições → Modelo de Dados** 2. Selecione o objeto ao qual pretende adicionar um campo -3. Clique em **+ Adicionar campo** +3. Clique **+ Novo Campo** 4. Escolha um **tipo de campo** (consulte [Campos](/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields) para ver todos os tipos) 5. Introduza o **nome do campo** e uma descrição opcional 6. Configure definições específicas do campo (ver abaixo) diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx index a7c7a2ea58..e3da6c01d1 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Objetos personalizados permitem armazenar informações exclusivas do seu negóc ## Etapas 1. Vá a **Definições → Modelo de Dados** -2. Clique em **+ Novo objeto** +2. Clique **+ Adicionar objeto** 3. Preencha: * **Nome no singular** (por exemplo, "Listagem") * **Nome no plural** (por exemplo, "Listagens") @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ O seu objeto aparece imediatamente na barra lateral. Novos objetos começam com campos básicos. Adicione campos personalizados para capturar os dados de que precisa: 1. Em **Definições → Modelo de Dados**, selecione o seu objeto -2. Clique em **+ Adicionar campo** +2. Clique **+ Novo Campo** 3. Escolha um tipo de campo, configure e guarde Consulte [Como criar campos personalizados](/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields) para obter detalhes sobre os tipos de campo e a configuração. @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ Para ligar o seu objeto a Pessoas, Empresas ou outros objetos, crie um campo de Se já não precisar de um objeto: -1. Vá a **Definições → Modelo de Dados** -2. Desative o objeto +1. Vá para **Configurações → Modelo de dados → objeto de escolha → configurações** +2. Clique no botão **Desativar** O objeto fica oculto, mas os dados são preservados. Pode reativar ou eliminar permanentemente mais tarde. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx index 862c20c8a9..1f1ac1a23d 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Ao ativar o alternador de relação de junção, a Twenty exibe os registros vin Primeiro, crie o objeto intermediário que manterá as conexões. 1. Vá a **Definições → Modelo de Dados** -2. Clique em **+ Novo objeto** +2. Clique **+ Adicionar objeto** 3. Dê um nome descritivo (por exemplo, "Atribuição de Projeto", "Membro da Equipe", "Pedido de Produto") 4. Ative a opção "Ignorar a criação de um campo Nome" diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx index 9ad3abfb37..63ebcab4f0 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Veja [Campos de relação](/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fie 1. Vá para **Configurações → Modelo de Dados** 2. Selecione o objeto no qual você deseja a relação (normalmente o lado "muitos") -3. Clique em **+ Adicionar campo** +3. Clique em **+ Novo campo** 4. Selecione **Relação** como o tipo de campo 5. Escolha o **objeto de destino** 6. Selecione **Um-para-muitos** ou **Muitos-para-um** @@ -42,16 +42,26 @@ Veja [Campos de relação](/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fie Agora, cada Pessoa pode ser vinculada a uma Empresa, e cada Empresa mostra suas Pessoas. -## Excluindo uma Relação +## Desativando uma Relação -1. Vá para **Configurações → Modelo de Dados** -2. Encontre o campo de relação -3. Clique em **⋮ → Desativar** +1. Vá para **Configurações → Modelo de Dados → objeto de escolha** +2. Encontre o campo de relação e clique nele +3. Clique no botão **Desativar** Os vínculos são preservados, mas ficam ocultos. Reative para restaurar. -**Excluir uma relação não exclui registros.** Apenas o vínculo entre eles é removido. +**Desativar uma relação não exclui registros.** Apenas o vínculo entre eles é removido. + + +## Excluindo uma Relação + +1. Vá para **Configurações → Modelo de Dados → objeto de escolha** +2. Encontre o campo de relação e clique nele +3. Clique no botão **Excluir** + + +Aplica-se apenas a relações personalizadas, relações padrão só podem ser desativadas. ## Relacionados diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx index 8ff3b9d8fd..a5c2631022 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx @@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ Todos os objetos ativos aparecem na navegação. Você pode desativar objetos qu Não, os tipos de campo não podem ser alterados após a criação. Se você precisar de um tipo diferente, crie um novo campo com o tipo correto, migre seus dados e, em seguida, desative o campo antigo. - Nossa API GraphQL usa ambas as formas para diferentes operações: * `createPerson` (singular) para ações de registro único @@ -73,15 +72,15 @@ Atualmente, não é possível tornar campos personalizados obrigatórios. Todos -Campos de fórmula estarão disponíveis em **Q1 2026**. Enquanto isso, você pode usar fluxos de trabalho para calcular e atualizar valores de campos automaticamente. +Campos de fórmula estão chegando em **H2 2026**. Enquanto isso, você pode usar fluxos de trabalho para calcular e atualizar valores de campos automaticamente. -Campos aninhados estarão disponíveis em **Q1 2026**. Atualmente, você pode usar fluxos de trabalho para trazer valores de campos de objetos relacionados. Por exemplo, para exibir a indústria de uma empresa em um registro de Pessoa, crie um campo personalizado em Pessoas e use um fluxo de trabalho para sincronizar o valor. +Campos aninhados estão vindo em **H2 2026**. Atualmente, você pode usar fluxos de trabalho para trazer valores de campos de objetos relacionados. Por exemplo, para exibir a indústria de uma empresa em um registro de Pessoa, crie um campo personalizado em Pessoas e use um fluxo de trabalho para sincronizar o valor. -A reordenação de campos estará disponível com layouts personalizados em **Q4 2025**. Atualmente, os campos aparecem em ordem alfabética. +Sim, vá para Configurações → Modelo de dados → objeto de sua escolha → Layout e clique em **Personalizar página de registro**. Se este botão estiver desativado, você deve criar um registro. @@ -93,7 +92,7 @@ Sim! Relações autorreferenciadas são suportadas e recomendadas para casos de -Relacionamentos muitos-para-muitos estarão disponíveis no **H1 2026**. Atualmente, crie um objeto intermediário com dois relacionamentos de um-para-muitos como uma solução alternativa. +Relações entre muitíssimas estão chegando em **H2 2026**. Atualmente, crie um objeto intermediário com dois relacionamentos de um-para-muitos como uma solução alternativa. Por exemplo, para vincular Pessoas e Projetos (muitos-para-muitos), crie um objeto "Atribuições de Projeto" com: * Uma relação com Pessoas (muitas atribuições → uma pessoa) @@ -147,6 +146,10 @@ Sim, você pode importar dados CSV para qualquer objeto, incluindo objetos perso Atualmente, não há exportação nativa para a configuração do modelo de dados. Entre em contato com o suporte se você precisar migrar seu modelo de dados entre espaços de trabalho. + + +O número máximo de campos que um único objeto pode ter é de 1600 campos como limites por Postgres, incluindo campos existentes e excluídos. Esteja ciente de que Vinte não vão consertar sua área de trabalho se o limite de 1600 campos for atingido, conforme se enquadra em nossa política de Uso Justo. + ## Precisa de mais ajuda? diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx index 87b3552c78..52a434d955 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx @@ -27,10 +27,6 @@ O Twenty oferece suporte a SSO com: * Acesso de administrador ao seu provedor de identidade * Acesso de administrador ao workspace do Twenty - -**Para usuários de auto-hospedagem que desejam configurar SSO**, entre em contato pelo contact@twenty.com - - ### Etapas de configuração #### 1. Acesse as configurações de SSO @@ -125,5 +121,5 @@ Se você encontrar problemas, contate o suporte com: * Detalhes da configuração (sem dados sensíveis) - Precisa de SSO configurado para a sua organização? [Encontre um parceiro Twenty certificado](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso) que seja especialista em SSO e configuração de identidade. *(Prefere envolver a Twenty diretamente? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com).)* +Precisa de SSO configurado para a sua organização? [Encontre um parceiro Twenty certificado](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso) que seja especialista em SSO e configuração de identidade. *(Prefere envolver a Twenty diretamente? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com))* diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx index a5bde4a254..e16a6b0891 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx @@ -7,15 +7,14 @@ As configurações de domínio ficam em três lugares, dependendo do que você e ## Domínio do espaço de trabalho -Configure em **Configurações → Geral → Domínio do workspace**. +Configure em **Configurações → Geral**. Edite o nome do seu subdomínio ou defina um domínio personalizado para o seu espaço de trabalho. ### Personalizar domínio -1. Clique em **Personalizar Domínio** -2. Edite seu subdomínio (por exemplo, `yourcompany.twenty.com`) -3. Ou configure um domínio personalizado (por exemplo, `crm.yourcompany.com`) +1. Clique em **Subdomínio** para editar seu subdomínio (ex: `yourcompany.twenty.com`) +2. Ou clique em **domínio personalizado** para configurar um domínio personalizado (ex.: `crm.yourcompany.com`) Para domínios personalizados, você precisará configurar as configurações de DNS com o seu provedor de domínio. @@ -45,7 +44,7 @@ Aplicativos que expõem rotas na web são servidos a partir de uma URL dedicada, ### Adicionar Domínio Personalizado -1. Clique em **Adicionar Domínio Personalizado** +1. Clique **Domínio personalizado** 2. Insira o domínio que você deseja usar (por exemplo, `app.yourcompany.com`) 3. Configure as configurações de DNS conforme as instruções 4. Verifique o domínio diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx index 7f4ce0f1a5..c96cc93f91 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Gerencie quem tem acesso ao seu espaço de trabalho em **Configurações → Mem ### Usando convite por e-mail -1. Vá para **Configurações → Membros** +1. Vá para **Configurações → Membros → Convites** 2. Clique em **+ Convidar** 3. Insira o endereço de e-mail da pessoa 4. Selecione uma função para o novo membro @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ A pessoa convidada receberá um e-mail com um link para ingressar no seu espaço ### Usando o Link de Convite -1. Vá para **Configurações → Membros** +1. Vá para **Configurações → Membros → Convites** 2. Copie o link de convite do espaço de trabalho 3. Compartilhe o link com novos membros da equipe 4. Eles terão acesso assim que se inscreverem @@ -28,10 +28,9 @@ A pessoa convidada receberá um e-mail com um link para ingressar no seu espaço ### Ver todos os membros -Vá para **Configurações → Membros** para ver: +Vá para **Configurações → Membros → Equipe** para ver todos os membros ativos -* Todos os membros ativos -* Convites pendentes +Vá para **Configurações → Membros → Convite** para ver convites pendentes ### Editar o perfil de um membro @@ -56,15 +55,15 @@ Na página de perfil do membro: ### Remover um membro 1. Clique no membro para abrir o perfil -2. Clique em **Excluir** para remover do espaço de trabalho +2. Clique em **Excluir conta** para removê-los da área de trabalho Membros removidos perdem o acesso imediatamente. Os dados deles (registros, notas, tarefas) permanecem no espaço de trabalho. - -**A sincronização de e-mail também é removida.** Se o usuário excluído era o único que sincronizava determinados e-mails, esses e-mails serão removidos permanentemente do espaço de trabalho. - + +E-mails e eventos da agenda de usuários excluídos estão arquivados e disponíveis para outros usuários. + ## Convites pendentes diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx index d450b2e5c6..90ff135e8b 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ description: Gerencie seu perfil pessoal e as configurações de segurança. Ative o 2FA para adicionar uma camada extra de segurança à sua conta: -1. Vá para **Configurações → Configurações de Perfil** -2. Clique em **Ativar 2FA** +1. Vá para **Configurações → Perfil** +2. Clique em **Aplicativo de Autenticação** 3. Escaneie o código QR com seu aplicativo autenticador 4. Digite o código de verificação para confirmar @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Excluir sua conta removerá permanentemente seu acesso a todos os workspaces. Es Para excluir sua conta: -1. Vá para **Configurações → Configurações de Perfil** +1. Vá para **Configurações → Perfil** 2. Role até **Zona de Perigo** 3. Clique em **Excluir Conta** 4. Confirme digitando seu endereço de e-mail diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx index 7a89b959de..4e7b4c547e 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Você pode configurar domínios de acesso aprovados para que membros da equipe c -Os recursos de Acesso antecipado são funcionalidades em teste antes do lançamento geral. Atualmente, apenas **Painéis** estão em Acesso antecipado. Eles podem mudar com base no feedback dos usuários. +Os recursos de Acesso antecipado são funcionalidades em teste antes do lançamento geral. Atualmente, apenas as **relações de junção** e **exibições do dia do calendário e da semana** estão em Acesso Antecipado. Eles podem mudar com base no feedback dos usuários. @@ -162,9 +162,10 @@ Os recursos de Acesso antecipado são funcionais, mas podem mudar com base no fe -1. Vá para **Configurações → Atualizações → Acesso antecipado** -2. Encontre o recurso que você deseja -3. Ative a opção -4. O recurso fica disponível imediatamente +1. Vá em **Configurações → Comunidade** +2. Rolar para baixo até a seção **Recursos** +3. Encontre o recurso que você deseja +4. Ative a opção +5. O recurso fica disponível imediatamente diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx index 7a184939d1..e8cafe4bdc 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/pt/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx @@ -26,4 +26,4 @@ Obtenha ajuda de nossa equipe principal com nossos pacotes de [Integração](htt ### Parceiros de Implementação -Trabalhe com parceiros certificados para personalizações avançadas. Contate-nos em contact@twenty.com para conectar-se com nossos [parceiros de implementação](https://twenty.com/partners). +Trabalhe com parceiros certificados para personalizações avançadas. Contacte-nos em [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com) para entrar em contacto com os nossos [parceiros de implementação](https://twenty.com/partners). diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx index d041b31060..67a4457e8d 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ export default definePageLayout({ ### Puncte cheie -* `type` este de obicei `'RECORD_PAGE'` pentru a personaliza vizualizarea de detaliu a unui obiect specific. +* `type` este unul dintre `'RECORD_INDEX'`, `'RECORD_PAGE'`, `'DASHBOARD'` sau `'STANDALONE_PAGE'`. Folosiți `'RECORD_PAGE'` pentru a personaliza vizualizarea de detaliu a unui obiect specific. * `objectUniversalIdentifier` specifică la ce obiect se aplică această machetă. * Fiecare `tab` definește o secțiune a paginii cu un `title`, `position` și `layoutMode` (`VERTICAL_LIST` pentru pagini ale înregistrărilor, `GRID` pentru dashboard-uri). Un tab care conține un singur widget îl afișează automat pe toată lățimea; cu mai multe widget-uri, acestea sunt aranjate în stivă, sub formă de carduri. * Fiecare `widget` dintr-o filă poate reda un [front component](/l/ro/developers/extend/apps/layout/front-components), o listă de relații sau alte tipuri de widgeturi integrate. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx index 60714e198d..b195f6ef7a 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx @@ -172,6 +172,28 @@ Rulați `UPDATE core."user" SET "canAccessFullAdminPanel" = TRUE WHERE email = ' În producție, funcțiile logice sunt dezactivate în mod implicit. Setați variabila de mediu `LOGIC_FUNCTION_TYPE` la `LOCAL` sau `LAMBDA` pentru a le activa. Acest lucru poate fi configurat prin variabile de mediu sau prin variabilele bazei de date din panoul de administrare. Consultați [Ghidul de configurare a funcțiilor logice](/l/ro/developers/self-host/capabilities/setup#logic-functions-available-drivers) pentru detalii. +#### Când tastez un mesaj în chat-ul AI, acesta nu răspunde imediat și trebuie să reîmprospătez pagina pentru a vedea răspunsul + +Adaugă următorul bloc la configurarea nginx + +``` +location ~* ^/api/.*stream|\/graphql\/stream { +proxy_pass http://twenty_backend; +proxy_http_version 1.1; +proxy_set_header Connection ""; +proxy_set_header Host $host; +proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-For $proxy_add_x_forwarded_for; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme; +proxy_buffering off; +proxy_request_buffering off; +proxy_cache off; +gzip off; +#chunked_transfer_encoding off; +add_header X-Accel-Buffering no always; +} +``` + ### Docker compose cu un singur click #### Nu se poate conecta diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/navigation.json b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/navigation.json index 1836d3497d..9830fb4a14 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/navigation.json +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/navigation.json @@ -145,6 +145,14 @@ "label": "How-Tos" } } + }, + "legal": { + "label": "Juridic", + "groups": { + "legalHowTos": { + "label": "Ghiduri practice" + } + } } } }, diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx index 671126ef78..d76d7d33a4 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Această funcționalitate este în planul nostru de dezvoltare. * Multe Persoane sunt legate de multe Proiecte -Relațiile mulți-la-mulți sunt planificate pentru H1 2026. +Multe relatii sunt planificate pentru H2 2026. ## Asocierea înregistrărilor în timpul importului diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx index 34be4ded2f..7b5478f78f 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Pentru a adăuga un câmp personalizat la orice obiect, urmați acești pași: 1. Accesați `Setări` din bara laterală stângă. 2. Accesați `Model de date`, apoi selectați obiectul pe care doriți să îl personalizați. -3. Continuați prin a face clic pe `Adaugă câmp`. +3. Continuați prin a face clic pe `+ New Field`. 4. Alegeți un nume și un tip de câmp care se potrivesc cerințelor dumneavoastră. Luați în considerare adăugarea unei descrieri a câmpului pentru o înțelegere mai bună. Noul câmp creat de dumneavoastră este acum disponibil în cadrul câmpurilor aplicației. Pentru a-l afișa într-o vizualizare specifică, faceți clic pe meniul de opțiuni, apoi selectați `Câmpuri`. @@ -78,9 +78,7 @@ Puteți dezactiva un câmp pentru a-l ascunde din aplicație fără a pierde dat Iată cum puteți face acest lucru: 1. Găsiți câmpul pe care doriți să-l dezactivați în setările obiectului dumneavoastră. - 2. Faceți clic pe cele trei puncte `⋮` de lângă câmp pentru a deschide meniul. - 3. Selectați `Dezactivează` din lista derulantă. @@ -88,9 +86,7 @@ Iată cum puteți face acest lucru: Ce se întâmplă când dezactivați un câmp? 1. **În aplicație:** Câmpul dispare și nu se pot adăuga valori noi la acesta. - 2. **Relații existente:** Dacă este un câmp de relație, conexiunile existente rămân, dar nu se pot crea noi. - 3. **Acces API:** Încă puteți accesa câmpul și datele sale prin API. Puteți reactiva câmpuri standard și personalizate sau aveți opțiunea de a le șterge permanent. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx index fa447f7c42..d5a67aca92 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Obiectele standard sunt entități predefinite în spațiul tău de lucru care t Obiectul `People` stochează contactele tale. Include detalii de contact și istoricul interacțiunilor, astfel încât să poți vedea toate interacțiunile cu clienții într-un singur loc. -### Companie +### Companii Obiectul `Companies` stochează conturile tale de afaceri. Include detalii precum industria, dimensiunea și locația. Companiile se conectează la obiectele `People` și `Opportunities`. @@ -47,7 +47,6 @@ Pentru a crea un obiect personalizat nou: 3. Fă clic pe `+ Obiect nou` în partea de sus. Introduceți numele (singular și plural), alegeți o pictogramă, adăugați o descriere pentru obiectul personalizat și apăsați Salvare (în dreptul sus). Folosind Listing ca exemplu de obiect personalizat, forma de singular ar fi "listing", iar pluralul ar fi "listings", împreună cu o descriere precum "Anunțuri pe care gazdele le-au creat pentru a-și prezenta proprietatea." - 4. Obiectul dvs. personalizat a fost creat și va apărea în bara laterală. Puteți începe să adăugați înregistrări imediat. ## Gestionarea obiectelor @@ -57,18 +56,20 @@ Pentru a crea un obiect personalizat nou: Dacă nu aveți nevoie de un obiect standard sau personalizat: 1. Accesați Setări → Model de date -2. Găsiți obiectul pe care doriți să-l dezactivați -3. Faceți clic pe comutator pentru a-l dezactiva -4. Obiectul va fi ascuns din spațiul dvs. de lucru, dar datele sunt păstrate +2. Găsește obiectul pe care vrei să-l dezactivezi și fă clic pe el +3. Du-te la fila **Setări** obiectului +4. Faceți clic pe butonul `Deactivate` +5. Obiectul va fi ascuns din spațiul dvs. de lucru, dar datele sunt păstrate ### Reactivarea obiectelor Pentru a readuce un obiect dezactivat: 1. Accesați Setări → Model de date -2. Căutați obiectele dezactivate (vor fi afișate în gri) -3. Faceți clic pe comutator pentru a-l reactiva -4. Obiectul și toate datele sale vor fi restaurate +2. Activează filtrul `Dezactivat` +3. Caută obiecte dezactivate (ele au "dezactivat" lângă numele lor) +4. Faceţi clic pe `·` şi apoi pe `Activează` pentru a reactiva +5. Obiectul și toate datele sale vor fi restaurate ## Cele mai bune practici diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx index 5d47fb3de2..6667987abb 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Relațiile de tip multe-la-multe folosesc un model de tip **obiect de legătură -**Funcție de laborator**: Relațiile cu obiect de legătură trebuie activate în **Settings → Updates → Lab** înainte de utilizare. +**Caracteristica laboratorului**: Relațiile cu JUNCT trebuie să fie activate la **Setări → Comunitate → Caracteristici** înainte de utilizare. Consultați [Cum să creați relații de tip multe-la-multe](/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations) pentru un ghid complet, pas cu pas. @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Consultați [Cum să creați relații de tip multe-la-multe](/l/ro/user-guide/da 1. Accesați **Setări → Model de date** 2. Selectați obiectul în care doriți să adăugați relația -3. Faceți clic pe **+ Adaugă câmp** +3. Click **+ Câmp nou** 4. Selectați **Relație** ca tip de câmp 5. Alegeți obiectul/obiectele țintă cu care să stabiliți relația 6. Configurați setările relației: diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx index 2aee748861..f8054e18c2 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Câmpurile personalizate vă permit să colectați informații specifice afaceri 1. Accesați **Setări → Model de date** 2. Selectați obiectul la care doriți să adăugați un câmp -3. Faceți clic pe **+ Adaugă câmp** +3. Click **+ Câmp nou** 4. Alegeți un **tip de câmp** (consultați [Câmpuri](/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields) pentru toate tipurile) 5. Introduceți **numele câmpului** și o descriere opțională 6. Configurați setările specifice câmpului (vedeți mai jos) diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx index 6555e6bc3b..3ba558f700 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Obiectele personalizate vă permit să stocați informații specifice afacerii d ## Pași 1. Accesați **Setări → Model de date** -2. Faceți clic pe **+ Obiect nou** +2. Faceți clic **+ Adăugați un obiect** 3. Completați: * **Nume la singular** (de ex., "Listare") * **Nume la plural** (de ex., "Listări") @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Obiectul dvs. apare imediat în bara laterală. Obiectele noi încep cu câmpuri de bază. Adăugați câmpuri personalizate pentru a colecta datele de care aveți nevoie: 1. În **Setări → Model de date**, selectați obiectul dvs. -2. Faceți clic pe **+ Adaugă câmp** +2. Click **+ Câmp nou** 3. Alegeți un tip de câmp, configurați și salvați Consultați [Cum să creați câmpuri personalizate](/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields) pentru detalii despre tipurile de câmp și configurare. @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ Pentru a conecta obiectul la Persoane, Companii sau alte obiecte, creați un câ Dacă nu mai aveți nevoie de un obiect: -1. Accesați **Setări → Model de date** -2. Dezactivați obiectul +1. Mergeți la **Setări → Model de date → obiect de alegere → Setări** +2. Faceți clic pe butonul **Dezactivare** Obiectul este ascuns, dar datele sunt păstrate. Îl puteți reactiva sau șterge definitiv mai târziu. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx index 018df6b59d..ac385b0479 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Când activați comutatorul pentru relația de legătură, Twenty afișează în Mai întâi, creați obiectul intermediar care va păstra conexiunile. 1. Accesați **Setări → Model de date** -2. Faceți clic pe **+ Obiect nou** +2. Faceți clic **+ Adăugați un obiect** 3. Dați-i un nume descriptiv (de ex., "Atribuire proiect", "Membru al echipei", "Comandă de produs") 4. Activați "Omite crearea unui câmp Nume" diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx index 160c65cded..31c7e178d1 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Consultați [Câmpuri de relație](/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/rela 1. Accesați **Setări → Model de date** 2. Selectați obiectul în care doriți relația (de obicei partea „mulți”) -3. Faceți clic pe **+ Adaugă câmp** +3. Click **+ Câmp nou** 4. Selectați **Relație** ca tip de câmp 5. Alegeți **obiectul țintă** 6. Selectați **Unu-la-mulți** sau **Mulți-la-unu** @@ -42,16 +42,26 @@ Consultați [Câmpuri de relație](/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/rela Acum fiecare persoană poate fi legată de o companie, iar fiecare companie își afișează persoanele. -## Ștergerea unei relații +## Dezactivarea unei Relații -1. Accesați **Setări → Model de date** -2. Găsiți câmpul de relație -3. Faceți clic pe **⋮ → Dezactivează** +1. Mergeți la **Setări → Model de date → obiect la alegere** +2. Găseşte câmpul de relaţie şi fă clic pe el +3. Apasă butonul **Dezactivează** Legăturile sunt păstrate, dar ascunse. Reactivați pentru a restabili. -**Ștergerea unei relații nu șterge înregistrările.** Doar legătura dintre ele este eliminată. +**Dezactivarea unei relații nu șterge înregistrările.** Numai legătura dintre ele este eliminată. + + +## Ștergerea unei relații + +1. Mergeți la **Setări → Model de date → obiect la alegere** +2. Găseşte câmpul de relaţie şi fă clic pe el +3. Apasă pe butonul **Șterge** + + +Aplică doar relațiilor personalizate, relațiile standard pot fi doar dezactivate. ## Conexe diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx index ccec112811..48891cc10f 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx @@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ Toate obiectele active apar în navigare. Poți dezactiva obiectele de care nu a Nu, tipurile de câmp nu pot fi modificate după creare. Dacă ai nevoie de un alt tip, creează un câmp nou cu tipul corect, migrează-ți datele, apoi dezactivează câmpul vechi. - API-ul nostru GraphQL folosește ambele forme pentru diferite operațiuni: * `createPerson` (singular) pentru acțiuni cu un singur înregistrare @@ -73,15 +72,15 @@ Anumite nume de câmpuri, precum `Type` sau `Application`, sunt rezervate pentru -Câmpurile cu formule vor fi disponibile în **T1 2026**. Între timp, poți folosi fluxuri de lucru pentru a calcula și actualiza automat valorile câmpurilor. +Câmpurile de formulă vin în **H2 2026**. Între timp, poți folosi fluxuri de lucru pentru a calcula și actualiza automat valorile câmpurilor. -Câmpurile imbricate vor fi disponibile în **T1 2026**. În prezent, poți folosi fluxuri de lucru pentru a prelua valorile câmpurilor din obiectele înrudite. De exemplu, pentru a afișa industria unei companii pe un document despre o Persoană, creează un câmp personalizat la Persoane și folosește un flux de lucru pentru a sincroniza valoarea. +Câmpurile imbricate vin în **H2 2026**. În prezent, poți folosi fluxuri de lucru pentru a prelua valorile câmpurilor din obiectele înrudite. De exemplu, pentru a afișa industria unei companii pe un document despre o Persoană, creează un câmp personalizat la Persoane și folosește un flux de lucru pentru a sincroniza valoarea. -Rearanjarea câmpurilor va fi disponibilă cu machete personalizate în **T4 2025**. În prezent, câmpurile apar în ordine alfabetică. +Da, mergi la Setări → Modelul de date → obiect la alegere → Layout şi apasă **Personalizează pagina înregistrării**. Dacă acest buton este dezactivat, trebuie să creaţi o înregistrare. @@ -93,7 +92,7 @@ Da! Relațiile auto-referențiale sunt acceptate și recomandate pentru cazuri p -Relațiile de tip mulți-la-mulți vor fi disponibile în **S1 2026**. În prezent, creează un obiect intermediar cu două relații de tip unu-la-mulți ca soluție temporară. +O mulțime de relații vin în **H2 2026**. În prezent, creează un obiect intermediar cu două relații de tip unu-la-mulți ca soluție temporară. De exemplu, pentru a lega Persoane și Proiecte (mulți-la-mulți), creează un obiect "Atribuiri de proiect" cu: * O relație către Persoane (multe atribuiri → o persoană) @@ -147,6 +146,10 @@ Da, poți importa date CSV în orice obiect, inclusiv în obiectele personalizat În prezent, nu există un export integrat pentru configurația modelului de date. Contactează asistența dacă ai nevoie să migrezi modelul de date între spații de lucru. + + +Numărul maxim de câmpuri pe care un singur obiect poate să le aibă este de 1600 câmpuri per limite Postgres, incluzând câmpuri existente și șterse. Fii conștient de faptul că 20 de câmpuri nu îți vor repara spațiul de lucru dacă limita de 1 600 de câmpuri va fi atinsă deoarece intră sub incidența politicii noastre de utilizare echitabilă. + ## Ai nevoie de mai mult ajutor? diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx index 99fe9ab316..ceaf9defaa 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx @@ -27,10 +27,6 @@ Twenty acceptă SSO cu: * Acces de administrator la furnizorul dvs. de identitate * Acces de administrator la spațiul de lucru Twenty - -**Pentru utilizatorii care se auto-găzduiesc și doresc să configureze SSO**, contactați contact@twenty.com - - ### Pași de configurare #### 1. Accesați setările SSO @@ -125,5 +121,5 @@ Dacă întâmpinați probleme, contactați asistența și furnizați: * Detalii de configurare (fără date sensibile) - Aveți nevoie de configurarea SSO pentru organizația dvs.? [Găsiți un partener Twenty certificat](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso) specializat în SSO și configurarea identității. *(Preferiți să implicați Twenty direct? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com).)* +Aveți nevoie de configurarea SSO pentru organizația dvs.? [Găsiți un partener Twenty certificat](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso) specializat în SSO și configurarea identității. *(Preferiți să implicați Twenty direct? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com))* diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx index 7ec31c5eb6..6c8f86602b 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx @@ -7,15 +7,14 @@ Setările de domeniu se află în trei locuri, în funcție de ceea ce configura ## Domeniu Spațiu de lucru -Configurați în **Setări → General → Domeniu al spațiului de lucru**. +Configurare sub **Setări → General**. Editați numele subdomeniului sau setați un domeniu personalizat pentru spațiul de lucru. ### Personalizează Domeniul -1. Faceți clic pe **Personalizați domeniul** -2. Editați subdomeniul (de ex., `yourcompany.twenty.com`) -3. Sau configurați un domeniu personalizat (de ex., `crm.yourcompany.com`) +1. Faceţi clic pe **Subdomeniul** pentru a vă edita subdomeniul (de exemplu, `compania.twenty.com`) +2. Sau faceţi clic pe **domeniu personalizat** pentru a configura un domeniu personalizat (de exemplu, `crm.yourcompany.com`) Pentru domeniile personalizate, va trebui să configurați setările DNS la furnizorul de domeniu. @@ -45,7 +44,7 @@ Aplicațiile care expun rute pe web sunt disponibile la un URL dedicat, afișat ### Adăugați domeniu personalizat -1. Faceți clic pe **Adăugați domeniu personalizat** +1. Faceți clic pe **Domeniu personalizat** 2. Introduceți domeniul pe care doriți să îl utilizați (de ex., `app.yourcompany.com`) 3. Configurați setările DNS conform instrucțiunilor 4. Verificați domeniul diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx index cd40e1460f..008fadc25a 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Gestionați cine are acces la spațiul dvs. de lucru din **Setări → Membri**. ### Utilizarea invitației prin e-mail -1. Mergi la **Setări → Membri** +1. Accesați **Setări → Membri → Invită** 2. Faceți clic pe **+ Invită** 3. Introdu adresa de e-mail a persoanei 4. Selectați un rol pentru noul membru @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Persoana invitată va primi un e-mail cu un link pentru a se alătura spațiului ### Utilizarea linkului de invitare -1. Mergi la **Setări → Membri** +1. Accesați **Setări → Membri → Invită** 2. Copiază link-ul de invitație pentru spațiul de lucru 3. Distribuie link-ul cu noii membri ai echipei 4. Vor primi acces odată ce se înscriu @@ -28,10 +28,9 @@ Persoana invitată va primi un e-mail cu un link pentru a se alătura spațiului ### Vizualizați toți membrii -Accesați **Setări → Membri** pentru a vedea: +Mergeți la **Setări → Membri → Echipă** pentru a vedea toți membrii activi -* Toți membrii activi -* Invitații în așteptare +Mergeți la **Setări → Membri → Invitați** pentru a vedea invitațiile în așteptare ### Editați profilul unui membru @@ -56,15 +55,15 @@ Pe pagina de profil a membrului: ### Eliminați un membru 1. Faceți clic pe membru pentru a-i deschide profilul -2. Faceți clic pe **Șterge** pentru a-i elimina din spațiul de lucru +2. Faceți clic pe **Ștergere cont** pentru a le elimina din spațiul de lucru Membrii eliminați își pierd accesul imediat. Datele lor (înregistrări, note, sarcini) rămân în spațiul de lucru. - -**Sincronizarea e-mailului este, de asemenea, eliminată.** Dacă utilizatorul șters era singurul care a sincronizat anumite e-mailuri, acele e-mailuri vor fi eliminate definitiv din spațiul de lucru. - + +E-mailurile și evenimentele din calendar ale utilizatorului șters sunt arhivate și disponibile pentru alți utilizatori. + ## Invitații în așteptare diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx index 8427200903..a2a13c6698 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ description: Gestionează setările personale ale profilului și setările de se Activează 2FA pentru a adăuga un strat suplimentar de securitate contului tău: -1. Mergi la **Setări → Setări profil** -2. Apasă pe **Activează 2FA** +1. Accesați **Setări → Profil** +2. Faceți clic pe **Aplicație de autentificare** 3. Scanează codul QR cu aplicația ta de autentificare 4. Introdu codul de verificare pentru a confirma @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Activează 2FA pentru a adăuga un strat suplimentar de securitate contului tău Pentru a șterge contul tău: -1. Mergi la **Setări → Setări profil** +1. Accesați **Setări → Profil** 2. Derulează până la **Zona de pericol** 3. Apasă pe **Șterge contul** 4. Confirmă introducând adresa ta de email diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx index ce664d3f29..77d9fce85b 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Puteți configura domenii de acces aprobate astfel încât membrii echipei cu ad -Funcțiile de Acces timpuriu sunt capabilități aflate în testare înainte de lansarea generală. În prezent, doar **Tablourile de bord** se află în Acces timpuriu. Se pot schimba pe baza feedback-ului utilizatorilor. +Funcțiile de Acces timpuriu sunt capabilități aflate în testare înainte de lansarea generală. În prezent, numai **relaţiile cu Juncker** şi **spectacolele cu ziua şi săptămâna** au acces timpuriu. Se pot schimba pe baza feedback-ului utilizatorilor. @@ -162,9 +162,10 @@ Funcțiile de Acces timpuriu sunt funcționale, dar se pot schimba pe baza feedb -1. Accesați **Setări → Actualizări → Acces timpuriu** -2. Găsiți funcția dorită -3. Activați-o -4. Funcția devine disponibilă imediat +1. Mergeți la **Setări → Comunitate** +2. Derulaţi în jos la secţiunea **Caracteristici** +3. Găsiți funcția dorită +4. Activați-o +5. Funcția devine disponibilă imediat diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx index acede20fd9..9fce502157 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Vizualizarea Calendar afișează înregistrările pe un calendar, pe baza unui c 1. Navigați la un obiect cu câmpuri de dată 2. Faceți clic pe meniul derulant al vizualizării → **+ Adaugă vizualizare** -3. Denumiți vizualizarea și faceți clic pe **Creează** +3. Denumiți vizualizarea și faceți clic pe **Creează** 4. Deschideți **Opțiuni** din partea dreaptă 5. Selectați **Calendar** ca dispunere 6. Alegeți **câmpul de dată** care va fi folosit pentru poziționarea înregistrărilor diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx index a798df6ffe..3cf730c024 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/ro/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx @@ -26,4 +26,4 @@ Obțineți ajutorul echipei noastre de bază cu pachetele noastre de 4 ore de [I ### Parteneri de implementare -Colaborați cu parteneri certificați pentru personalizări avansate. Contactați-ne la contact@twenty.com pentru a vă conecta cu partenerii noștri de [implementare](https://twenty.com/partners). +Colaborați cu parteneri certificați pentru personalizări avansate. Contactați-ne la [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com) pentru a ne conecta cu [partenerii noștri de implementare](https://twenty.com/partners). diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx index 55fc13a337..f9ad213a82 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ export default definePageLayout({ ### Önemli noktalar -* `type` genellikle belirli bir nesnenin ayrıntı görünümünü özelleştirmek için `'RECORD_PAGE'` olur. +* `type`, `'RECORD_INDEX'`, `'RECORD_PAGE'`, `'DASHBOARD'` veya `'STANDALONE_PAGE'` değerlerinden biridir. Belirli bir nesnenin ayrıntı görünümünü özelleştirmek için `'RECORD_PAGE'` kullanın. * `objectUniversalIdentifier`, bu düzenin hangi nesneye uygulanacağını belirtir. * Her `tab`, bir `title`, `position` ve `layoutMode` ile sayfanın bir bölümünü tanımlar (kayıt sayfaları için `VERTICAL_LIST`, panolar için `GRID`). Tek bir bileşen içeren bir sekme, onu otomatik olarak tam genişlikte görüntüler; birden fazla bileşenle kartlar halinde üst üste dizilir. * Bir sekmenin içindeki her `widget`, bir [ön uç bileşeni](/l/tr/developers/extend/apps/layout/front-components), bir ilişki listesi veya diğer yerleşik widget türlerini oluşturabilir. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx index 9967179580..cf96ce409f 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx @@ -171,6 +171,28 @@ Veritabanı konteynerinde `UPDATE core."user" SET "canAccessFullAdminPanel" = TR Üretimde, mantık işlevleri varsayılan olarak devre dışıdır. Bunları etkinleştirmek için `LOGIC_FUNCTION_TYPE` ortam değişkenini `LOCAL` veya `LAMBDA` olarak ayarlayın. Bu, ortam değişkenleri aracılığıyla veya yönetici panelindeki veritabanı değişkenleri üzerinden yapılandırılabilir. Ayrıntılar için [Mantık İşlevleri kurulum kılavuzu](/l/tr/developers/self-host/capabilities/setup#logic-functions-available-drivers) bölümüne bakın. +#### AI sohbetinde bir mesaj yazdığımda hemen yanıt vermiyor ve yanıtı görmek için sayfayı yenilemem gerekiyor + +Aşağıdaki bloğu nginx yapılandırmasına ekleyin + +``` +location ~* ^/api/.*stream|\/graphql\/stream { +proxy_pass http://twenty_backend; +proxy_http_version 1.1; +proxy_set_header Connection ""; +proxy_set_header Host $host; +proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-For $proxy_add_x_forwarded_for; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme; +proxy_buffering off; +proxy_request_buffering off; +proxy_cache off; +gzip off; +#chunked_transfer_encoding off; +add_header X-Accel-Buffering no always; +} +``` + ### 1-tıklama ile Docker Compose #### Giriş Yapılamıyor diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/navigation.json b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/navigation.json index 2dd83a2290..c5d2ff0685 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/navigation.json +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/navigation.json @@ -145,6 +145,14 @@ "label": "Nasıl Yapılırlar" } } + }, + "legal": { + "label": "Yasal", + "groups": { + "legalHowTos": { + "label": "Nasıl Yapılırlar" + } + } } } }, diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx index 4853519a97..56a54b23a5 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Bu özellik yol haritamızda. * Birçok Kişi birçok Projeye bağlıdır -Çoktan-Çoka ilişkiler 2026 H1 için planlanıyor. +Çoktan-Çoka ilişkiler 2026 H2 için planlanıyor. ## İçe Aktarma Sırasında Kayıtları Bağlama diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx index a6f427acd4..6539b462a0 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Herhangi bir nesneye özel bir alan eklemek için şu adımları izleyin: 1. Sol kenar çubuğundaki `Ayarlar`a gidin. 2. `Veri Modeli`ne gidin, ardından özelleştirmek istediğiniz nesneyi seçin. -3. `Alan Ekle`ye tıklayarak devam edin. +3. `+ New Field`e tıklayarak devam edin. 4. İhtiyaçlarınıza uygun bir alan adı ve türü seçin. Daha iyi anlama için bir alan açıklaması eklemeyi düşünün. Yeni oluşturulan alanınız artık uygulamanın alanları içinde kullanılabilir durumda. Belirli bir görünümde görüntülemek için, seçenekler menüsüne tıklayın ve ardından `Alanlar`ı seçin. @@ -78,9 +78,7 @@ Verilerinizi kaybetmeden alanı uygulamadan gizlemek için devre dışı bıraka İşte bu işlemi nasıl yapacağınız: 1. Nesne ayarlarınızda devre dışı bırakmak istediğiniz alanı bulun. - 2. Alan yanındaki üç noktaya `⋮` tıklayarak menüyü açın. - 3. Açılacak listeden `Devre Dışı Bırak`ı seçin. @@ -88,9 +86,7 @@ Verilerinizi kaybetmeden alanı uygulamadan gizlemek için devre dışı bıraka Bir alanı devre dışı bıraktığınızda ne olur? 1. **Uygulamada:** Alan kaybolur ve ona yeni değerler ekleyemezsiniz. - -2. **Mevcut ilişki:** Eğer bir ilişki alanıysa, mevcut bağlantılar kalır ama yeni bağlantılar oluşturamazsınız. - +2. **Mevcut ilişkiler:** Eğer bir ilişki alanıysa, mevcut bağlantılar kalır ama yeni bağlantılar oluşturamazsınız. 3. **API erişimi:** Halen alanı ve verilerini API aracılığıyla erişebilirsiniz. Standart ve Özel Alanları tekrar etkin hale getirebilir veya kalıcı olarak silebilirsiniz. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx index 4831a4ada7..76137740cc 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Standart nesneler, işe başlamanıza yardımcı olmak için çalışma alanın `İnsanlar` nesnesi, kişilerinizi saklar. Bu nesne, iletişim detayları ve etkileşim geçmişini içerir, böylece tüm müşteri etkileşimlerinizi tek bir yerde görebilirsiniz. -### Şirket +### Şirketler `Şirketler` nesnesi, iş hesaplarınızı saklar. Endüstri, boyut ve konum gibi detayları içerir. Şirketler, hem `İnsanlar` hem de `Fırsatlar` nesnelerine bağlanır. @@ -47,7 +47,6 @@ Yeni bir özel nesne oluşturmak için: 3. Üstteki `+ Yeni nesne` butonuna tıklayın. Adı (tekil ve çoğul olarak), bir simge seçip özel nesneniz için bir açıklama ekleyin ve Kaydet'e tıklayın (sağ üstte). Özel nesne olarak ilanı kullanarak, tekil "ilan" ve çoğul "ilanlar" olur, "Ev sahiplerinin mülklerini sergilemek için oluşturdukları ilanlar." gibi bir açıklamayla. - 4. Özel nesneniz oluşturuldu ve kenar çubuğunuzda görünecek. Hemen ona kayıt eklemeye başlayabilirsiniz. ## Nesneleri Yönetme @@ -57,18 +56,20 @@ Yeni bir özel nesne oluşturmak için: Standart veya özel bir nesneye ihtiyacınız yoksa: 1. Ayarlar → Veri Modeli'ne gidin -2. Devre dışı bırakmak istediğiniz nesneyi bulun -3. Devre dışı bırakmak için geçiş düğmesine tıklayın -4. Nesne çalışma alanınızdan gizlenecek ancak veriler korunur +2. Devre dışı bırakmak istediğiniz nesneyi bulun ve tıklayın +3. Nesnenin **Settings** sekmesine gidin +4. `Deactivate` düğmesine tıklayın +5. Nesne çalışma alanınızdan gizlenecek ancak veriler korunur ### Nesneleri Yeniden Etkinleştirme Devre dışı bırakılmış bir nesneyi geri getirmek için: 1. Ayarlar → Veri Modeli'ne gidin -2. Devre dışı bırakılmış nesneleri arayın (gri renkte görüneceklerdir) -3. Yeniden etkinleştirmek için geçiş düğmesine tıklayın -4. Nesne ve tüm verileri geri yüklenecektir +2. `Deactivated` filtresini etkinleştirin +3. Devre dışı bırakılmış nesneleri arayın (adlarının yanında `Deactivated` yazar) +4. `⋮` öğesine ve ardından yeniden etkinleştirmek için `Activate` öğesine tıklayın +5. Nesne ve tüm verileri geri yüklenecektir ## En İyi Uygulamalar diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx index d5b199951c..807ed9d019 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Nesne A'daki birçok kayıt, Nesne B'deki birçok kayda bağlanabilir. -**Lab Özelliği**: Kesişim ilişkileri, kullanılmadan önce **Settings → Updates → Lab** bölümünde etkinleştirilmelidir. +**Lab Özelliği**: Kesişim ilişkileri, kullanılmadan önce **Settings → Community → Features** bölümünde etkinleştirilmelidir. Eksiksiz bir adım adım kılavuz için [Çoktan Çoğa İlişkiler Nasıl Oluşturulur](/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations) bölümüne bakın. @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Eksiksiz bir adım adım kılavuz için [Çoktan Çoğa İlişkiler Nasıl Oluş 1. **Ayarlar → Veri Modeli** bölümüne gidin 2. İlişki eklemek istediğiniz nesneyi seçin -3. **+ Alan Ekle**'ye tıklayın +3. **+ New field**'e tıklayın 4. Alan türü olarak **İlişki**'yi seçin 5. İlişkilendirilecek hedef nesne(leri) seçin 6. İlişki ayarlarını yapılandırın: diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx index 585885acc1..dc2bd9dafd 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ description: Herhangi bir nesneye özel alan eklemeye yönelik adım adım kıla 1. **Ayarlar → Veri Modeli** bölümüne gidin 2. Alan eklemek istediğiniz nesneyi seçin -3. **+ Alan Ekle**'ye tıklayın +3. **+ Yeni Alan**'a tıklayın 4. **alan türü** seçin (tüm türler için [Alanlar](/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields) bölümüne bakın) 5. **alan adını** ve isteğe bağlı açıklamayı girin 6. Alana özel ayarları yapılandırın (aşağıya bakın) diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx index 4b7289018c..e84952a9f7 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ description: Twenty'de özel nesneler oluşturmaya yönelik adım adım kılavuz ## Adımlar 1. **Ayarlar → Veri Modeli** bölümüne gidin -2. **+ Yeni nesne**'ye tıklayın +2. **+ Nesne Ekle**'ye tıklayın 3. Şunları doldurun: * **Tekil ad** (ör. "İlan") * **Çoğul ad** (ör. "İlanlar") @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Nesneniz hemen kenar çubuğunda görünür. Yeni nesneler temel alanlarla başlar. Gereksinim duyduğunuz verileri toplamak için özel alanlar ekleyin: 1. **Ayarlar → Veri Modeli** bölümünde nesnenizi seçin -2. **+ Alan Ekle**'ye tıklayın +2. **+ Yeni Alan**'a tıklayın 3. Bir alan türü seçin, yapılandırın ve kaydedin Alan türleri ve yapılandırmasıyla ilgili ayrıntılar için [Özel Alanlar Nasıl Oluşturulur](/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields) bölümüne bakın. @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ Nesnenizi Kişiler, Şirketler veya diğer nesnelere bağlamak için bir ilişki Artık bir nesneye ihtiyacınız yoksa: -1. **Ayarlar → Veri Modeli** bölümüne gidin -2. Nesneyi devre dışı bırakın +1. **Ayarlar → Veri Modeli → seçtiğiniz nesne → Ayarlar**'a gidin +2. **Devre Dışı Bırak** düğmesine tıklayın Nesne gizlenir ancak veriler korunur. Daha sonra yeniden etkinleştirebilir veya kalıcı olarak silebilirsiniz. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx index 75950a6135..e3d9818101 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Bağlantı ilişkisi anahtarını etkinleştirdiğinizde, Twenty aradaki bağlan Önce, bağlantıları tutacak ara nesneyi oluşturun. 1. **Ayarlar → Veri Modeli** bölümüne gidin -2. **+ Yeni nesne**'ye tıklayın +2. **+ Nesne ekle**'ye tıklayın 3. Açıklayıcı bir ad verin (örn. "Project Assignment", "Team Member", "Product Order") 4. "Ad alanı oluşturmayı atla" seçeneğini açın diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx index 7133b698f2..1a13943b47 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Karar verin: 1. **Ayarlar → Veri Modeli** bölümüne gidin 2. İlişkinin olmasını istediğiniz nesneyi seçin (genellikle "çok" tarafı) -3. **+ Alan Ekle**'ye tıklayın +3. **+ New Field**'e tıklayın 4. Alan türü olarak **İlişki**'yi seçin 5. **Hedef nesne**yi seçin 6. **Bire-Çok** veya **Çoktan-Bire** seçin. @@ -42,16 +42,26 @@ Karar verin: Artık her Kişi bir Şirkete bağlanabilir ve her Şirket kendi Kişilerini gösterir. -## Bir İlişkiyi Silme +## Bir İlişkiyi Devre Dışı Bırakma -1. **Ayarlar → Veri Modeli** bölümüne gidin -2. İlişki alanını bulun -3. **⋮ → Devre Dışı Bırak**'a tıklayın +1. **Ayarlar → Veri Modeli → seçtiğiniz nesne** bölümüne gidin +2. İlişki alanını bulun ve tıklayın +3. **Devre Dışı Bırak** düğmesine tıklayın Bağlantılar korunur ancak gizlenir. Geri yüklemek için yeniden etkinleştirin. -**Bir ilişkiyi silmek, kayıtları silmez.** Yalnızca aralarındaki bağlantı kaldırılır. +**Bir ilişkiyi devre dışı bırakmak, kayıtları silmez.** Yalnızca aralarındaki bağlantı kaldırılır. + + +## Bir İlişkiyi Silme + +1. **Ayarlar → Veri Modeli → seçtiğiniz nesne** bölümüne gidin +2. İlişki alanını bulun ve tıklayın +3. **Sil** düğmesine tıklayın + + +Yalnızca özel ilişkilere uygulanır, standart ilişkiler yalnızca devre dışı bırakılabilir. ## İlgili diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx index 916dd00818..ccb84b9970 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx @@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ Tüm aktif nesneler gezinme menüsünde görünür. **Ayarlar → Veri Modeli** Hayır, alan türleri oluşturulduktan sonra değiştirilemez. Farklı bir türe ihtiyacınız varsa, doğru türde yeni bir alan oluşturun, verilerinizi taşıyın ve ardından eski alanı devre dışı bırakın. - GraphQL API'miz farklı işlemler için her iki biçimi de kullanır: * Tek bir kayıt eylemleri için `createPerson` (tekil) @@ -73,15 +72,15 @@ Bu, tekil ve çoğul biçimler aynı olduğunda sınırlamalar yaratır ancak ge -Formül alanları **2026'nın ilk çeyreğinde** gelmektedir. Bu arada, alan değerlerini otomatik olarak hesaplamak ve güncellemek için iş akışlarını kullanabilirsiniz. +Formül alanları **2026'nın ikinci yarısında** geliyor. Bu arada, alan değerlerini otomatik olarak hesaplamak ve güncellemek için iş akışlarını kullanabilirsiniz. -İç içe alanlar **2026'nın ilk çeyreğinde** gelmektedir. Şu anda, ilişkili nesnelerden alan değerleri getirmek için iş akışlarını kullanabilirsiniz. Örneğin, bir Kişi kaydında bir şirketin sektörünü görüntülemek için, Kişiler üzerinde özel bir alan oluşturun ve değeri eşzamanlamak için bir iş akışı kullanın. +İç içe alanlar **2026'nın ikinci yarısında** geliyor. Şu anda, ilişkili nesnelerden alan değerleri getirmek için iş akışlarını kullanabilirsiniz. Örneğin, bir Kişi kaydında bir şirketin sektörünü görüntülemek için, Kişiler üzerinde özel bir alan oluşturun ve değeri eşzamanlamak için bir iş akışı kullanın. -Alan yeniden düzenlemesi, **2025'in dördüncü çeyreğinde** özel düzenlerle birlikte kullanılabilir olacaktır. Şu anda alanlar alfabetik sırada görünür. +Evet, Ayarlar → Veri modeli → seçtiğiniz nesne → Düzen bölümlerine gidin ve **Kayıt sayfasını özelleştir**'e tıklayın. Bu düğme devre dışıysa bir kayıt oluşturmanız gerekir. @@ -93,7 +92,7 @@ Evet! Kendine başvuran ilişkiler desteklenir ve hesap hiyerarşileri gibi kull -Çoktan-çoka ilişkiler **H1 2026**'da geliyor. Şimdilik geçici çözüm olarak, iki adet bire-çok ilişkiye sahip bir ara nesne oluşturun. +Çoktan-çoka ilişkiler **2026'nın ikinci yarısında** geliyor. Şimdilik geçici çözüm olarak, iki adet bire-çok ilişkiye sahip bir ara nesne oluşturun. Örneğin, Kişiler ve Projeleri (çoktan-çoka) bağlamak için "Project Assignments" adında şu özelliklere sahip bir nesne oluşturun: * Kişilere bir ilişki (birçok atama → bir kişi) @@ -147,6 +146,10 @@ Evet, özel nesneler de dahil olmak üzere herhangi bir nesneye CSV verisi içe Şu anda, veri modeli yapılandırması için yerleşik bir dışa aktarma yok. Veri modelinizi çalışma alanları arasında taşımanız gerekiyorsa destek ile iletişime geçin. + + +Tek bir nesnenin sahip olabileceği en fazla alan sayısı, mevcut ve silinmiş alanlar dahil olmak üzere, Postgres sınırlarına göre 1600 alandır. 1600 alan sınırına ulaşıldığında bunun Adil Kullanım politikamız kapsamında olduğundan Twenty çalışma alanınızı düzeltmeyeceğini unutmayın. + ## Daha Fazla Yardım mı İhtiyacınız Var? diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx index 827d048363..13988afbcd 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx @@ -27,10 +27,6 @@ Twenty, SSO'yu şu sağlayıcılarla destekler: * Kimlik sağlayıcınıza yönetici erişimi * Twenty çalışma alanına yönetici erişimi - -**SSO'yu kurmak isteyen öz barındırma kullanıcıları için**, contact@twenty.com ile iletişime geçin - - ### Yapılandırma Adımları #### 1. SSO Ayarlarına Erişim @@ -125,5 +121,5 @@ Sorunlarla karşılaşırsanız, desteğe şu bilgilerle ulaşın: * Yapılandırma ayrıntıları (hassas veriler olmadan) - Kuruluşunuz için SSO yapılandırılması mı gerekiyor? SSO ve kimlik kurulumunda uzmanlaşmış [sertifikalı bir Twenty iş ortağı bulun](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso). *(Twenty'yi doğrudan sürece dahil etmeyi mi tercih edersiniz? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com).)* +Kuruluşunuz için SSO yapılandırılması mı gerekiyor? SSO ve kimlik kurulumunda uzmanlaşmış [sertifikalı bir Twenty iş ortağı bulun](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso). *(Twenty'yi doğrudan sürece dahil etmeyi mi tercih edersiniz? [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com))* diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx index 6135b34e5e..78137559dd 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx @@ -7,15 +7,14 @@ Alan adı ayarları, neyi yapılandırdığınıza bağlı olarak üç yerde bul ## İş Alanı Alan Adı -**Ayarlar → Genel → Çalışma Alanı Alan Adı** altında yapılandırın. +**Ayarlar → Genel** altında yapılandırın. Alt alan adınızı düzenleyin veya çalışma alanınız için özel bir alan adı ayarlayın. ### Alan adını özelleştir -1. **Alan Adını Özelleştir**'e tıklayın -2. Alt alan adınızı düzenleyin (örneğin, `yourcompany.twenty.com`) -3. Veya özel bir alan adı ayarlayın (örneğin, `crm.yourcompany.com`) +1. Alt alan adınızı düzenlemek için **Alt alan adı**'na tıklayın (örneğin, `yourcompany.twenty.com`) +2. Veya özel bir alan adı ayarlamak için **Özel alan adı**'na tıklayın (örneğin, `crm.yourcompany.com`) Özel alan adları için, DNS ayarlarını alan adı sağlayıcınız üzerinden yapılandırmanız gerekir. @@ -45,7 +44,7 @@ Web üzerinde rota sunan uygulamalar, **Uygulama URL'si** bölümünde gösteril ### Özel Alan Adı Ekle -1. **Özel Alan Adı Ekle**'ye tıklayın +1. **Özel alan adı**'na tıklayın 2. Kullanmak istediğiniz alan adını girin (örneğin, `app.yourcompany.com`) 3. DNS ayarlarını talimatlara uygun şekilde yapılandırın 4. Alan adını doğrulayın diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx index c483cb79c5..007c83f18a 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ description: Ekip üyelerini davet edin ve iş alanı erişimini yönetin. ### E-posta Davetini Kullanma -1. **Ayarlar → Üyeler** bölümüne gidin +1. **Ayarlar → Üyeler → Davet** bölümüne gidin 2. **+ Davet Et**'e tıklayın 3. Kişinin e-posta adresini girin 4. Yeni üye için bir rol seçin @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Davet edilen kişi, iş alanınıza katılmak için bir bağlantı içeren bir e ### Davet Bağlantısını Kullanma -1. **Ayarlar → Üyeler** bölümüne gidin +1. **Ayarlar → Üyeler → Davet** bölümüne gidin 2. Çalışma alanı davet bağlantısını kopyalayın 3. Bağlantıyı yeni takım üyeleriyle paylaşın 4. Kaydolduktan sonra erişim kazanacaklar @@ -28,10 +28,9 @@ Davet edilen kişi, iş alanınıza katılmak için bir bağlantı içeren bir e ### Tüm Üyeleri Görüntüle -Şunları görmek için **Ayarlar → Üyeler** bölümüne gidin: +Tüm aktif üyeleri görmek için **Settings → Members → Team** bölümüne gidin -* Tüm aktif üyeler -* Bekleyen davetler +Bekleyen davetleri görmek için **Settings → Members → Invite** bölümüne gidin ### Bir Üyenin Profilini Düzenle @@ -56,15 +55,15 @@ Profil sayfasını açmak için bir üyeye tıklayın. Yönetici olarak şunlar ### Bir Üyeyi Kaldır 1. Profilini açmak için üyeye tıklayın -2. İş alanından kaldırmak için **Sil**'e tıklayın +2. Onları iş alanından kaldırmak için **Delete account**'a tıklayın Kaldırılan üyelerin erişimi hemen kesilir. Verileri (kayıtlar, notlar, görevler) iş alanında kalır. - -**E-posta senkronizasyonu da kaldırılır.** Silinen kullanıcı belirli e-postaları senkronize eden tek kişiyse, bu e-postalar iş alanından kalıcı olarak kaldırılır. - + +Silinen kullanıcının e-postaları ve takvim etkinlikleri arşivlenir ve diğer kullanıcıların erişimine açık olur. + ## Bekleyen Davetler diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx index d7b6c9fca5..1ffee94c05 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ description: Kişisel profilinizi ve güvenlik ayarlarınızı yönetin. 2FA etkinleştirerek hesabınıza ekstra güvenlik katmanı ekleyin: -1. **Ayarlar → Profil Ayarları**'na gidin -2. **2FA Etkinleştir**'e tıklayın +1. **Ayarlar → Profil** bölümüne gidin +2. **Doğrulama Uygulaması**'na tıklayın 3. QR kodunu yetkilendirme uygulamanızla tarayın 4. Doğrulama kodunu girerek onaylayın @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Hesabınızı silmek, tüm çalışma alanlarınıza olan erişiminizi kalıcı Hesabınızı silmek için: -1. **Ayarlar → Profil Ayarları**'na gidin +1. **Ayarlar → Profil** bölümüne gidin 2. **Tehlike Bölgesi**'ne kadar kaydırın 3. **Hesabı Sil**'e tıklayın 4. E-posta adresinizi yazarak onaylayın diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx index a83cef9cec..369c4d3e27 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Alt alan adı kurmak hızlıdır; özel alan adı ise ekibiniz için tam markal -Erken Erişim özellikleri, genel kullanıma sunulmadan önce test edilen özelliklerdir. Şu anda yalnızca **Panolar** Erken Erişim'de. Kullanıcı geri bildirimlerine bağlı olarak değişebilir. +Erken Erişim özellikleri, genel kullanıma sunulmadan önce test edilen özelliklerdir. Şu anda yalnızca **Junction relations** ve **Calendar Day and Week Views** Erken Erişim aşamasındadır. Kullanıcı geri bildirimlerine bağlı olarak değişebilir. @@ -162,9 +162,10 @@ Erken Erişim özellikleri işlevseldir, ancak kullanıcı geri bildirimlerine b -1. **Ayarlar → Güncellemeler → Erken Erişim** bölümüne gidin -2. İstediğiniz özelliği bulun -3. Açık konuma getirin -4. Özellik hemen kullanılabilir hale gelir +1. **Ayarlar → Community** bölümüne gidin +2. Aşağı kaydırarak **Özellikler** bölümüne gidin +3. İstediğiniz özelliği bulun +4. Açık konuma getirin +5. Özellik hemen kullanılabilir hale gelir diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx index 79344e5dde..096300998a 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Takvim görünümü, kayıtlarınızı bir tarih alanına göre bir takvimde gö 1. Tarih alanları olan bir nesneye gidin 2. Görünüm açılır menüsüne tıklayın → **+ Görünüm ekle** -3. Görünümünüze bir ad verin ve **Oluştur**'a tıklayın +3. Görünümünüze bir ad verin ve **Oluştur**'a tıklayın 4. Sağ taraftaki **Seçenekler**'i açın 5. Düzen olarak **Takvim**'i seçin 6. Kayıtları konumlandırmak için kullanılacak **tarih alanını** seçin diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx index f1bd0f7831..f106f1c988 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/tr/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx @@ -26,4 +26,4 @@ Dört saatlik [Başlangıç paketlerimiz](https://twenty.com/onboarding-packages ### Uygulama Ortakları -Gelişmiş özelleştirmeler için sertifikalı ortaklarla çalışın. [Uygulama ortaklarımızla](https://twenty.com/partners) bağlantıya geçmek için bizimle contact@twenty.com adresinden iletişime geçin. +Gelişmiş özelleştirmeler için sertifikalı ortaklarla çalışın. Bizimle iletişime geçmek için [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com) adresine yazın veya [uygulama iş ortaklarımız](https://twenty.com/partners) ile bağlantı kurun. diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx index db8fa78239..c409f2fff3 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/developers/extend/apps/layout/page-layouts.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ export default definePageLayout({ ### 关键点 -* `type` 通常为 'RECORD_PAGE'，用于自定义特定对象的详情视图。 +* `type` 为 `'RECORD_INDEX'`、`'RECORD_PAGE'`、`'DASHBOARD'` 或 `'STANDALONE_PAGE'` 之一。 使用 `'RECORD_PAGE'` 来自定义特定对象的详情视图。 * `objectUniversalIdentifier` 指定此布局适用于哪个对象。 * 每个 `tab` 使用 `title`、`position` 和 `layoutMode` 定义页面的一个部分（记录页面使用 `VERTICAL_LIST`，仪表板使用 `GRID`）。 包含单个小部件的选项卡会自动将其渲染为全宽显示；包含多个小部件时，它们会堆叠为卡片。 * 选项卡内的每个 `widget` 可以渲染一个[前端组件](/l/zh/developers/extend/apps/layout/front-components)、关系列表或其他内置小部件类型。 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx index 238e1e4250..2e6546feeb 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/developers/self-host/capabilities/troubleshooting.mdx @@ -171,6 +171,28 @@ plugins: [ 在生产环境中，逻辑函数默认处于禁用状态。 将 `LOGIC_FUNCTION_TYPE` 环境变量设置为 `LOCAL` 或 `LAMBDA` 以启用它们。 这可以通过环境变量或管理面板的数据库变量进行配置。 详情请参见[逻辑函数设置指南](/l/zh/developers/self-host/capabilities/setup#logic-functions-available-drivers)。 +#### 当我在 AI 聊天中输入消息时，它不会立即回答，我必须刷新页面才能看到答案 + +将以下块添加到 nginx 配置 + +``` +location ~* ^/api/.*stream|\/graphql\/stream { +proxy_pass http://twenty_backend; +proxy_http_version 1.1; +proxy_set_header Connection ""; +proxy_set_header Host $host; +proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-For $proxy_add_x_forwarded_for; +proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme; +proxy_buffering off; +proxy_request_buffering off; +proxy_cache off; +gzip off; +#chunked_transfer_encoding off; +add_header X-Accel-Buffering no always; +} +``` + ### 一键使用 Docker Compose #### 无法登录 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/navigation.json b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/navigation.json index c76a066f54..53ebd19ac1 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/navigation.json +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/navigation.json @@ -145,6 +145,14 @@ "label": "操作指南" } } + }, + "legal": { + "label": "法律", + "groups": { + "legalHowTos": { + "label": "操作指南" + } + } } } }, diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx index 64d0d60cae..d342e499c6 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-migration/capabilities/import-relations.mdx @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Twenty 支持一条记录关联到多条记录的标准关系： * 多个人员关联到多个项目 -多对多关系计划在 2026 年上半年推出。 +多对多关系计划在 2026 年下半年推出。 ## 在导入过程中关联记录 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx index 4c1f617084..ae0525a00b 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields.mdx @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Twenty 支持多种字段类型： 1. 转到左侧栏的`设置`。 2. 转到`数据模型`，然后选择您想要自定义的对象。 -3. 继续点击`添加字段`。 +3. 继续点击`+ New Field`。 4. 选择适合您要求的字段名称和类型。 考虑添加字段描述以便更好地理解。 您新创建的字段现在可以在应用程序的字段中使用。 要将其显示在特定视图中，请单击选项菜单，然后选择`字段`。 @@ -78,9 +78,7 @@ Twenty 支持多种字段类型： 您可以这样做： 1. 在对象设置中找到您想停用的字段。 - 2. 点击字段旁边的三点`⋮`打开菜单。 - 3. 从下拉菜单选择`停用`。 @@ -88,9 +86,7 @@ Twenty 支持多种字段类型： 停用字段会发生什么？ 1. **在应用程序中：** 字段消失，您不能向其中添加新值。 - 2. **现有关系：** 如果它是一个关系字段，现有连接将保留，但不能创建新连接。 - 3. **通过API访问：** 您仍然可以通过API访问字段及其数据。 您可以重新激活标准字段和自定义字段，或有选择地将其永久删除。 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx index 0ca5435707..295466aee4 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/objects.mdx @@ -47,7 +47,6 @@ import { VimeoEmbed } from '/snippets/vimeo-embed.mdx'; 3. 点击顶部的`+ 新对象`。 输入名称（单数和复数），选择图标，添加自定义对象的描述，然后点击保存（在右上角）。 以Listing作为自定义对象的示例，单数为"listing"，复数为"listings"，以及像“房东创建的用于展示其物业的列表”这样的描述。 - 4. 您的自定义对象已创建，并会显示在侧边栏中。 您可以立即开始向其中添加记录。 ## 管理对象 @@ -57,18 +56,20 @@ import { VimeoEmbed } from '/snippets/vimeo-embed.mdx'; 如果您不再需要某个标准对象或自定义对象： 1. 进入 设置 → 数据模型 -2. 找到您要停用的对象 -3. 点击切换开关将其停用 -4. 该对象将在您的工作区中隐藏，但数据会被保留 +2. 查找您想要停用的对象并单击它 +3. 转到对象的 **设置** 标签 +4. 单击“停用”按钮 +5. 该对象将在您的工作区中隐藏，但数据会被保留 ### 重新启用对象 要恢复已停用的对象： 1. 进入 设置 → 数据模型 -2. 查找已停用的对象（它们会显示为灰色） -3. 点击切换开关将其重新启用 -4. 该对象及其所有数据将被恢复 +2. 启用 "停用" 过滤器 +3. 寻找已停用的对象 (他们名字旁边有`停用`) +4. 单击`connec`，然后`Activate`重新激活它 +5. 该对象及其所有数据将被恢复 ## 最佳实践 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx index fec9950b89..92e3a2e289 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/relation-fields.mdx @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ description: 使用关系字段在不同对象之间关联记录。 -**实验功能**：使用前必须在 **Settings → Updates → Lab** 中启用连接关系。 +**实验室特色**：在使用前必须在 **设置 -> 社区 -> 特色** 启用交接关系。 请参阅 [如何创建多对多关系](/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations) 以获取完整的分步指南。 @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ description: 使用关系字段在不同对象之间关联记录。 1. 进入 **设置 → 数据模型** 2. 选择要添加关系的对象 -3. 点击 **+ 添加字段** +3. 点击 **+ 新字段** 4. 将字段类型选择为 **关系** 5. 选择要关联到的目标对象 6. 配置关系设置： diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx index de0c5052d8..885aa95a02 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ description: 逐步指南：向任何对象添加自定义字段。 1. 进入 **设置 → 数据模型** 2. 选择要添加字段的对象 -3. 点击 **+ 添加字段** +3. 点击 **+ 新字段** 4. 选择**字段类型**（所有类型请参见[字段](/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/capabilities/fields)） 5. 输入**字段名称**和可选描述 6. 配置特定于该字段的设置（见下文） diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx index 5e6402bb9a..3f02b13fa7 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-objects.mdx @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ description: 在 Twenty 中创建自定义对象的分步指南。 ## 步骤 1. 进入 **设置 → 数据模型** -2. 点击 **+ 新建对象** +2. 点击 **+ 添加对象** 3. 填写： * **单数名称**（例如，"Listing"） * **复数名称**（例如，"Listings"） @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ description: 在 Twenty 中创建自定义对象的分步指南。 新建对象默认包含一些基础字段。 添加自定义字段以捕获所需数据： 1. 在 **设置 → 数据模型** 中，选择您的对象 -2. 点击 **+ 添加字段** +2. 点击 **+ 新字段** 3. 选择字段类型，配置并保存 有关字段类型和配置的详细信息，请参阅[如何创建自定义字段](/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-custom-fields)。 @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ description: 在 Twenty 中创建自定义对象的分步指南。 如果您不再需要某个对象： -1. 进入 **设置 → 数据模型** -2. 将该对象切换为关闭状态 +1. 转到**设置 -> 数据模型 -> 选择对象 → 设置** +2. 点击 **停用** 按钮 该对象会被隐藏，但数据会被保留。 您可以稍后重新启用或永久删除。 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx index de160fee30..e9f8415488 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-many-to-many-relations.mdx @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ People ←→ Project Assignments ←→ Projects 首先，创建用于保存关联的中间对象。 1. 进入 **设置 → 数据模型** -2. 点击 **+ 新建对象** +2. 点击 **+ 添加对象** 3. 使用描述性名称（例如，"Project Assignment"、"Team Member"、"Product Order"） 4. 将“跳过创建名称字段”切换为开启 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx index 6f6fd2d970..f5295ca9d5 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/create-relation-fields.mdx @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ description: 通过关系字段逐步将对象连接起来。 1. 进入 **设置 → 数据模型** 2. 选择要创建关系的对象（通常为“多”端） -3. 点击 **+ 添加字段** +3. 点击 **+ 新建字段** 4. 将字段类型选择为 **关系** 5. 选择**目标对象** 6. 选择 **一对多** 或 **多对一** @@ -42,16 +42,26 @@ description: 通过关系字段逐步将对象连接起来。 现在，每个人员都可以关联到一家公司，每家公司都会显示其人员。 -## 删除关系 +## 停用关系 -1. 进入 **设置 → 数据模型** -2. 找到该关系字段 -3. 点击 **⋮ → 停用** +1. 进入 **Settings → Data Model → object of choice** +2. 找到关系字段并点击 +3. 点击 **Deactivate** 按钮 关联会被保留但隐藏。 重新启用即可恢复。 -**删除关系不会删除记录。** 只会移除它们之间的关联。 +**停用关系不会删除记录。** 只会移除它们之间的关联。 + + +## 删除关系 + +1. 进入 **Settings → Data Model → object of choice** +2. 找到关系字段并点击 +3. 点击 **Delete** 按钮 + + +仅适用于自定义关系，标准关系只能被停用。 ## 相关内容 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx index 7540da7a9e..21f20ee472 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/data-model/how-tos/data-model-faq.mdx @@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ description: 关于 Twenty 数据模型的常见问题。 不可以，字段类型在创建后无法更改。 如果您需要其他类型，请创建一个具有正确类型的新字段，迁移您的数据，然后停用旧字段。 - 我们的 GraphQL API 针对不同操作使用单复数形式： * `createPerson`（单数）用于单个记录操作 @@ -73,15 +72,15 @@ description: 关于 Twenty 数据模型的常见问题。 -公式字段将在 **2026 年第一季度** 推出。 同时，您可以使用工作流程来自动计算和更新字段值。 +公式字段在 **H2 2026** 中。 同时，您可以使用工作流程来自动计算和更新字段值。 -嵌套字段将在 **2026 年第一季度** 推出。 目前，您可以使用工作流程从相关对象中获取字段值。 例如，要在人员记录上显示公司的行业信息，可以在人员自定义字段中创建一个自定义字段，并使用工作流程来同步该值。 +嵌套字段将于 **H2 2026**。 目前，您可以使用工作流程从相关对象中获取字段值。 例如，要在人员记录上显示公司的行业信息，可以在人员自定义字段中创建一个自定义字段，并使用工作流程来同步该值。 -字段重新排序将伴随自定义布局在 **2025 年第四季度** 推出。 目前，字段按字母顺序显示。 +是的，前往设置 -> 数据模型 → 您选择的对象-> 布局，并点击 **自定义记录页面**。 如果此按钮被禁用，您必须创建记录。 @@ -93,7 +92,7 @@ description: 关于 Twenty 数据模型的常见问题。 -多对多关系将在 **2026 年上半年** 推出。 目前，可以创建一个中间对象，建立两个一对多关系作为替代方案。 +多对多的关系出现在 **H2 2026**。 目前，可以创建一个中间对象，建立两个一对多关系作为替代方案。 例如，要关联人员和项目（多对多），请创建一个 "项目分配" 对象，其中包含： * 到人员的关系（多个分配 → 一名人员） @@ -147,6 +146,10 @@ description: 关于 Twenty 数据模型的常见问题。 目前，数据模型配置没有内置导出功能。 如果您需要在工作区之间迁移数据模型，请联系支持团队。 + + +单个对象可以拥有的最大字段数为 1600个字段，按Postgres 限制, 包括现有字段和删除字段。 请注意，如果达到1600个字段的上限，二十个不会修复您的工作空间，因为它属于我们的公平使用政策。 + ## 需要更多帮助吗？ diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx index 3b031cc254..dea2df2dd0 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/permissions-access/capabilities/sso-configuration.mdx @@ -27,10 +27,6 @@ Twenty 支持以下 SSO： * 对您的身份提供商的管理员访问权限 * 对 Twenty 工作区的管理员访问权限 - -**对于希望设置 SSO 的自托管用户**，请联系 contact@twenty.com - - ### 配置步骤 #### 1. 访问 SSO 设置 @@ -125,5 +121,5 @@ Twenty 支持以下 SSO： * 配置详情（不含敏感数据） - 需要为您的组织配置 SSO 吗？ [寻找经过认证的 Twenty 合作伙伴](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso)，专注于 SSO 和身份配置。 *（更希望直接让 Twenty 参与？ [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com)。）* +需要为您的组织配置 SSO 吗？ [寻找经过认证的 Twenty 合作伙伴](https://twenty.com/partners/list?categories=SOLUTIONING\&ref=docs-sso)，专注于 SSO 和身份配置。 \*（更希望直接让 Twenty 参与？ [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com)＊ diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx index 77c3eede37..e31fbcb870 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/capabilities/domains-settings.mdx @@ -7,15 +7,14 @@ description: 配置工作区的域名、已批准的访问域名，以及应用 ## 工作区域 -在 **设置 → 常规 → 工作区域名** 下进行配置。 +在 **设置 -> 通用** 下配置。 编辑您的子域名或为您的工作区设置一个自定义域名。 ### 自定义域名 -1. 点击 **自定义域** -2. 编辑您的子域名(例如，`yourcompany.twenty.com`) -3. 或者设置一个自定义域名(例如`crm.youry.com`) +1. 点击 **Subdomain** 编辑您的子域名(例如，`yourcompany.twenty.com`) +2. 或者点击**自定义域** 来设置一个自定义域(例如`crm.yourcompany.com`) 对于自定义域名，您需要与域提供商配置DNS设置。 @@ -45,7 +44,7 @@ description: 配置工作区的域名、已批准的访问域名，以及应用 ### 添加自定义域名 -1. 点击 **添加自定义域名** +1. 点击 **自定义域** 2. 输入你想要使用的域名（例如：`app.yourcompany.com`） 3. 按指示配置DNS设置 4. 验证域 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx index 3de6215ba2..ae47e6ae81 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/capabilities/member-management.mdx @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ description: 邀请团队成员并管理工作区访问权限。 ### 使用电子邮件邀请 -1. 转到 **设置 → 成员** +1. 转到 **设置 → 成员 → 邀请** 2. 点击 **+ 邀请** 3. 输入该人的电子邮件地址 4. 为新成员选择一个角色 @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ description: 邀请团队成员并管理工作区访问权限。 ### 使用邀请链接 -1. 转到 **设置 → 成员** +1. 转到 **设置 → 成员 → 邀请** 2. 复制工作区邀请链接 3. 与新团队成员分享链接 4. 注册后他们将获得访问权限 @@ -28,10 +28,9 @@ description: 邀请团队成员并管理工作区访问权限。 ### 查看所有成员 -转到 **设置 → 成员** 以查看： +转到**设置→ 成员 -> 团队** 查看所有活跃成员 -* 所有活跃成员 -* 待处理的邀请 +转到**设置→ 成员 -> 邀请** 查看待处理的邀请 ### 编辑成员的个人资料 @@ -56,15 +55,15 @@ description: 邀请团队成员并管理工作区访问权限。 ### 移除成员 1. 点击该成员以打开其个人资料 -2. 点击 **删除**，将其从工作区移除 +2. 点击 **删除帐户** 将其从工作区删除 被移除的成员将立即失去访问权限。 其数据（记录、备注、任务）将保留在工作区中。 - -**电子邮件同步也会被移除。** 如果被删除的用户是唯一同步某些邮件的人，这些邮件将从工作区中永久移除。 - + +已删除用户的电子邮件和日历事件已存档并可供其他用户使用。 + ## 待处理的邀请 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx index 6c7d2d4e26..ab59d41908 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/capabilities/profile-settings.mdx @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ description: 管理您的个人资料和安全设置。 启用 2FA 为您的帐户增加一个额外的安全层： -1. 转到 **设置 → 个人资料设置** -2. 单击 **启用 2FA** +1. 转到 **设置 → 个人资料** +2. 单击 **身份验证器应用** 3. 使用您的身份验证应用扫描 QR 码 4. 输入验证码以确认 @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ description: 管理您的个人资料和安全设置。 要删除您的帐户： -1. 转到 **设置 → 个人资料设置** +1. 转到 **设置 → 个人资料** 2. 滚动至 **危险区** 3. 单击 **删除帐户** 4. 输入您的电子邮箱地址以确认 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx index 3a8dbc699d..7044745de2 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/settings/how-tos/settings-faq.mdx @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ description: 关于 Twenty 设置的常见问题。 -早期访问功能是在正式发布前进行测试的功能。 目前，只有**仪表板**处于早期访问阶段。 它们可能会根据用户反馈而改变。 +早期访问功能是在正式发布前进行测试的功能。 目前，只有**交接关系** 和 **日历日和周视图** 处于提早存取状态。 它们可能会根据用户反馈而改变。 @@ -162,9 +162,10 @@ description: 关于 Twenty 设置的常见问题。 -1. 前往 **设置 → 更新 → 早期访问** -2. 找到您想要的功能 -3. 将其切换为开启 -4. 该功能将立即可用 +1. 转到**设置 -> 社区** +2. 向下滚动到 **功能** 部分 +3. 找到您想要的功能 +4. 将其切换为开启 +5. 该功能将立即可用 diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx index 2356835683..d8d8536012 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/views-pipelines/capabilities/calendar-view.mdx @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ description: 在日历上显示带有日期字段的记录。 1. 导航到包含日期字段的对象 2. 单击视图下拉菜单 → **+ 添加视图** -3. 为视图命名并单击 **创建** +3. 命名您的视图并点击 **创建** 4. 打开右侧的 **选项** 5. 选择 **日历** 作为布局 6. 选择用于定位记录的 **日期字段** diff --git a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx index 32457eb796..ea2fb20856 100644 --- a/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx +++ b/packages/twenty-docs/l/zh/user-guide/workflows/how-tos/need-more-help/professional-services.mdx @@ -26,4 +26,4 @@ description: 获取 Twenty 团队及认证合作伙伴的帮助，构建复杂 ### 实施合作伙伴 -与认证合作伙伴合作进行高级定制。 通过 contact@twenty.com 与我们的[实施合作伙伴](https://twenty.com/partners)联系。 +与认证合作伙伴合作进行高级定制。 请通过 [contact@twenty.com](mailto:contact@twenty.com) 与我们联系，以便与我们的[实施合作伙伴](https://twenty.com/partners)建立联系。